Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Root Search
tal has 2 results
        Root Word (Pāṇini Dhātupāṭha:)Full Root MarkerSenseClassSutra
√ṭalṭalaavaiklavye1562
√taltalaapratiṣṭhāyām1053
 
 
tal has 2 results
Root WordIAST MeaningMonier Williams PageClass
√टल्ṭalbecoming confused or disturbed / vaiklavya1020/3Cl.1
√तल्talestablishing / pratiṣṭhā671/2Cl.10
Amarakosha Search
22 results
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
adhobhuvanamNeuterSingularpātālam, balisadma, rasātalam, nāgalokaḥa festival
agādhamMasculineSingularatalasparśamvery deep
alakaḥ2.6.97MasculineSingularcūrṇakuntalaḥ
capeṭaḥ2.6.84MasculineSingularpratalaḥ, prahastaḥ
godhaḥ2.8.85FeminineSingulartalam
keśaḥ2.6.96MasculineSingularkacaḥ, śiroruhaḥ, cikuraḥ, kuntalaḥ, bālaḥ
matallikāFeminineSingularuddhaḥ, tallajaḥ, macarcikā, prakāṇḍamexcellence or happiness
nimitam3.3.83NeuterSingularnistalam, padyam, caritram, atītam, dṛḍham
pratalaḥ2.6.86MasculineSingularsiṃhatalaḥ
saptalāFeminineSingularvimalā, talā, bhūriphenā, carmakaṣā
suṣīmaḥ1.3.19MasculineSingularhimaḥ, śiśiraḥ, jaḍaḥ, tuṣāraḥ, śītalaḥ, śītaḥchillness
talam3.3.210MasculineSingularnirṇītam, ekaḥ, kṛtsnam
talinam3.3.134MasculineSingularaparāddhaḥ, abhigrastaḥ, vyāpadgataḥ
talpam3.3.138NeuterSingularkūrmī, vīṇābhedaḥ
tunnaḥMasculineSingularkuṇiḥ, kacchaḥ, kāntalakaḥ, nandivṛkṣaḥ, kuberakaḥ
vartulam3.1.68MasculineSingularnistalam, vṛttam
vātakaḥMasculineSingularaparājitā, śataparṇī, śītalaḥ
taliḥ1.1.47MasculineSingularthe charioter of indra
matallikāFeminineSingularuddhaḥ, tallajaḥ, macarcikā, prakāṇḍamexcellence or happiness
saptalāFeminineSingularnavamālikā
saptalāFeminineSingularvimalā, talā, bhūriphenā, carmakaṣā
pratalaḥ2.6.86MasculineSingularsiṃhatalaḥ
Monier-Williams Search
649 results for tal
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
tal cl.1.10. talati-, tālayati- (fr. tarati-, tāray-, tṝ-) to accomplish (a vow) ; to establish, fix (derived fr. 1. talita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tala(m. ) n. ( stṛ-) surface, level, flat roof (of a house) etc. (chiefly in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' [f(ā-). ] see nabhas--, mahī--etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. the part underneath, lower part, base, bottom etc. (see adhas--, taru--etc.)
talamn. the palm (of the handSee kara--, pāṇi--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamn. the sole (of the foot, aṅghri--, pāda--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamn. (without kara--etc.) the palm of the hand (anyo 'nyasya-,or parasparaṃ talaṃ-or lān--,to slap each other with the palms of the hands) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. n. the sole of the foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. the fore-arm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. equals tāla- (a span ;the handle of a sword ;the palmyra tree ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. pressing the strings of a lute with the left hand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. Name of a hell (see talātala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. Name of a teacher gaRa śaunakādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. equals -hṛdaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. equals talka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. equals talaka- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. equals talla- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. the root or seed of events View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. equals -tra- (tala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāf. id. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāf. Name of a daughter of raudrāśva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāf. see a--, jihvā--, ni--, nis--, pra--, mahā--, rasā--, vi--, su--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talabaddhamfn. equals baddha-tala-, having fastened round one's arm the tala- (-tra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talabhan. m. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talācīf. "spread on the ground", a mat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talagatamfn. "being in one's palm", taṃ-kṛ-, to call together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talaghātam. a slap with the palm or paw View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talahṛdayan. the centre of the sole of the foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāhvayam. Flacourtia cataphracta View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakam. a small cart with burning coals View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakam. a pot of clay View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakan. equals taḍaga-, a pond (also tala-and talla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakan. a kind of salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakoṭaName of a plant (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talalokam. "the lower world" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talalokapālam. a guardian of that world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamīnam. varia lectio for nal- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamukham. a particular position of the hands in dancing. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāṅgulitravatmfn. furnished with and tala- (-tra-) and aṅguli-tra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talaniṣpeṣam. striking (of the bow-string) against the tala- (-tra-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talaprahāram. equals -ghāta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talaprahāram. Name of a hero (also raka-, ri-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talapuṣpapuṭan. a particular position in dancing. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talārakṣam. a body-guard (equals aṅga-r-?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāśāf. a kind of tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talaśabdam. equals -tāla- (varia lectio la-yuddha-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talasampātam. equals -tāla- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talasārakan. a horse's food-receptacle View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talasāraṇan. idem or 'n. a horse's food-receptacle ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talasārikam. idem or 'n. idem or 'n. a horse's food-receptacle ' ' or equals uraḥ-paṭṭikā- (Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāsim. plural strokes with the palms and with swords View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talasthamfn. remaining beneath View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talasthitamfn. idem or 'mfn. remaining beneath ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatālam. clapping the hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talātalan. Name of a hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talātalan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talātaliind. (to fight) with the palms of the hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatasind. from the bottom. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatram. "arm-guard", a leathern fence worn by archers on the left arm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatrāṇa equals -tra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatravatmfn. furnished with that fence, 14465. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavam. a musician View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavakāram. plural Name of a school of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavakārabrāhmaṇan. another Name of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavakārakalpam. the ritual of the talava-kāra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavakāropaniṣadf. another Name of or View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavaram. equals rakṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavāraṇan. equals -tra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talavāraṇan. equals tara-vāri- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talayuddhan. "palm-fight" See -śabda-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talayuktamfn. furnished with a handled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talekṣaṇam. "looking downwards", a hog View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talīdyan. a particular part of the body
talikāf. equals la-sāraka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taliman. (fr. la-?) ground prepared for the site of a dwelling (kuṭṭima-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taliman. a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taliman. an awning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taliman. a sword (see la-vāraṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinmfn. equals la-tra-vat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinmfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinamf(ā-)n. thin, fine (see luna-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinamf(ā-)n. "slender, meagre", in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinamf(ā-)n. small, little View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinamf(ā-)n. separate, having spaces View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinamf(ā-)n. clear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinamfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (fr. la-) covered with, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinam. Name of a man , (varia lectio nal-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinan. a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talinodarīf. a slender-waisted woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talitamfn. "bottomed", fixed, placed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talitamfn. fried View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talkan. a forest (see tala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallam. () equals talaka- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallan. " equals ālavāla- "or"a pit" (also tala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallajam. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' an excellent specimen of. exempli gratia, 'for example' kumārī--,"an excellent maiden" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallajam. see go-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallajam. matallikā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallakṣaṇan. his or her or its or their mark View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallakṣaṇan. a particular high number View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallakṣaṇaSee . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talf. a young woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talf. varuṇa-'s wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talf. a boat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tallikāf. equals tālī-, a key View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talodāf. "whose water flows downwards", a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talodara varia lectio for til-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpa(n. ) m. ( tṛp-) a couch, bed, sofa etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-). ; lpam ā-vas-,"to defile any one's marriage-bed"; lpam-adhi-gam-,"to have sexual intercourse with"[in compound ] ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpam. the seat of a carriage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpam. an upper story, room on the top of a house, turret, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpam. equals guru-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpam. a raft, boat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpam. a wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talf. a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpagamfn. having sexual intercourse with See guru--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpagirim. Name of a mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpajamfn. born (on a marriage-bed id est) of a wife (by an appointed substitute) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpakam. (for kalp-,a barber?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpakīṭam. "bed insect", a bug View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpalam. (gaRa kapilakādi- ) idem or 'n. the exterior muscles of an elephant's back ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpanan. the exterior muscles of an elephant's back View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpaśadyan. resting on a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpaśīvanmf(varī-)n. resting or lying on a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpe locative case of pa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpejamf(ā-)n. produced on a bed or couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpeśayamf(-)n. equals paś/īvan- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpīkṛtamfn. made into a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpyamfn. belonging to a bed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpyamfn. worthy of a couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talpyamfn. equals tālpa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talukṣam. Name of a man (see t/arukṣa-) gaRa 2. lohitāḍi- (not in ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talunamfn. (equals taruṇa- Va1rtt. 6 ; gaRa kapilakādi- ) young. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talunam. (gaRa utsādi-) a youth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talunam. wind. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talunīf. ( gaRa gaurādi-;proparox. Va1rtt. 6 ) a maiden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talvan. scent arising from the rubbing of fragrant substances View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhijñānaśakuntalan. title of a play of kālidāsa- id est (the nāṭaka-or play) on the subject of"token-(recognized)- śakuntalā-" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhūtalasparśatāf. not touching the ground, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhastalan. the room below anything. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agaṇitalajjamfn. disregarding shame. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agratalasaṃcāram. a partic, posture in dancing, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āhatalakṣaṇamfn. one whose marks or characteristics are mentioned, famed, reputed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āhitalakṣaṇamfn. noted or known for good qualities (equals ā-hatal- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āhitalakṣaṇamfn. one who has laid down his banner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ajātalomanmf(mnī-)n. whose signs of puberty are not yet developed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amṛtalatā f. a creeping plant that gives nectar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amṛtalatikāf. a creeping plant that gives nectar
amṛtalokam. the world of the immortals View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
añcitalāṅgūlamfn. having a curved tail (as a monkey). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
animittaliṅganāsam. "unaccountable loss of distinct vision", Name of an ophthalmic disease ending in total blindness (perhaps amaurosis). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
animittalipif. a particular mode of writing, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antalīnamfn. hidden, concealed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antalopam. (in grammar) the dropping of the final of a word.
anuraktalokam. a person to whom every one is attached. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpādatalamastakamind. from the sole of the foot to the head, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpātalikāf. Name of a vaitālīya- metre. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ārāmaśītalāf. Name of a plant with fragrant leaves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśītalamf(ā-)n. hot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
astalagnan. the western horizon, , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvamatallikāand - macarcikā-, f. (= - kuñjara-), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding ii, 1, 66, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atalan. bottomless View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atalan. Name of a hell beneath the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atalam. Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atalasparśa mfn. whose bottom cannot be reached, bottomless. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atalaspṛśmfn. whose bottom cannot be reached, bottomless. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āttalakṣmimfn. stripped of wealth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
attalim. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avātalamfn. not flatulent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avyaktalakṣaṇamfn. whose marks are imperceptible, Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahutalavaśāf. Iris Pseudacorus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāṣpapihitalocana() mfn. having eyes suffused with tears. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhānumataliṅgaśāstra n. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūmitalan. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) the surface of the earth, the ground (also plural) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalan. the surface of the ground, the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalasthamfn. standing or being on the face of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalasthānam. a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalikāf. Trigonella Corniculata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalipif. "demon-writing", Name of a particular magical formula View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtalonmathanam. "earth-shaker", Name of a dānava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhuvanatalan. the surface of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakrāṅkitapāṇipādatalatāf. having the palms of hands and feet marked with a wheel (one of the 32 signs of perfection), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakratalāmram. a kind of mango tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturṛddhipādacaraṇatalasupratiṣṭhitamfn. well-established on the soles of the feet of the supernatural power (Buddha) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
citratalamfn. painted or variegated on the surface
cittalamf(ā-)n. (fr. citrala-) moderate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cūrṇakuntalam. a lock of hair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatikāf. a kind of sport View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talatikāf. Name of a woman, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantalekhakam. one who lives by painting the teeth on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dantalīnamfn. that to which the teeth adhere (?), , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devatalpam. couch of the gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhanurjyātalaśabdam. the mere twanging noise of the bow-string View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharaṇitalan. the surface of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharaṇītalan. the surface of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharaṇītalaśrīm. Name of a prince of the kiṃnara-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharaṇitalataitilam. a god on earth, a Brahman
dhūlīpatalan. & View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhūmrasaṃraktalocanamfn. having dark-red or greyish-red eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhūrtalavaṇan. a kind of salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhyānastimitalocanamfn. having an eye rigid by meditation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dīptalocanam. "having glittering eyes", a cat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dīptalohan. the shining metal, brass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyūtalekhakam. or n. a gambling-bill View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gabhastalan. equals gabhasti-mat- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaganatalan. the vault of the sky, firmament View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇanāvartalipif. a kind of writing, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇitalatāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gatalajjam. "shameless", Name of an author of Prakrit verses. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gatalakṣmīkamfn. unfortunate, suffering losses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaurutalpikam. equals gurutalpa-ga- gaRa paradārādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghṛtalekhanīf. a ladle for ghee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghṛtalekhinīf. idem or 'f. a ladle for ghee ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghṛtalolīkṛtamfn. mixed with or steeped in ghee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gomatallikāf. ( ) an excellent cow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gopotalikāf. a cow Introd. 35; 97, and on Va1rtt. 6. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gotallajam. an excellent cow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpam. "a teacher's bed", in compound
gurutalpam. the violation of a teacher's bed (intercourse with his wife) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpam. a violator of his teacher's bed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpābhigamanan. idem or 'f. the violation of a teacher's bed, 107' (see gaurutalpika-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpagamfn. one who violates his teacher's bed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpagāminmfn. idem or 'mfn. one who violates his teacher's bed etc.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpāpanuttif. the violation of a teacher's bed, 107 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalparatamfn. idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. one who violates his teacher's bed etc.' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpavratan. penance for violating a teacher's bed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurutalpinmfn. equals lpa-ga- (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritalatāf. equals pattrikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harmyatala() n. the flat roof or upper room of any mansion or palace. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastalāghavan. lightness of hand, manual readiness, cleverness (reckoned among the 64 kalā-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastalāghavan. a real injury View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastalakṣaṇan. Name of the 28th pariśiṣṭa- of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastalekham. hand-drawing (khīkṛ-,"to draw, sketch") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastalepanan. an ointment for the hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastatalan. the (palm of the) hand (See compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastatalan. the tip of an elephant's trunk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastatalagatamfn. being (al. ready) in one's hand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hatalakṣaṇamfn. deprived of auspicious marks, unlucky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himasītalamfn. very cold or frosty, freezing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himatalaName of a kingdom (more correctly hema-tāla-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hitalālaśarman(miśra-hita-l-) m. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ilātalan. the fourth place in the circle of the zodiac View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ilātalan. the surface of the earth. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jagatītalan. "earth-surface", the ground, soil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jālābaddhāṅgulipāṇipādatalstāf. the having the soles of the feet and palms and fingers covered with nets (or cross-lines; one of the 32 signs of perfection), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jalakuntalam. "water-hair", Blyxa octandra View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jihvātalan. the surface of the tongue View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jitaloka(t/a--) mfn. plural those who have conquered heaven (a class of manes) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaladhautalipif. (?) a streak of gold, illumination of a manuscript with gold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāntalakam. the tree Cedrela Toona (commonly tunna-,the wood of which resembles mahogany) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāntalauhan. cast-iron (see loha-kānta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāntalohan. the loadstone View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṇṭhatalāsikāf. the leather or rope passing round the neck of a horse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalam. the palm of the hand etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalāf. a knife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karataladhṛtamfn. held in the hand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalagatamfn. being in the hand or in one's possession View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalamalakan. "a myrobalan lying in the hand", anything quite clear to all eyes. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalasthamfn. resting in the palm of the hand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalatālam. clapping the hands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalīkṛto take in the palm of the hand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karatalīkṛtamfn. taken in the open hand, lying open. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṣāyīkṛtalocanamfn. having reddened eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāṣṭhaputtalikāf. a wooden image, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. a kind of large fish (Cyprinus Catla see kātara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. Name of a man gaRa naḍādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāyanam. a descendant of kātala- gaRa naḍādi- (see kātarāyaṇa-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṭītalan. a crooked sword, sabre, scymitar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kauntalam. plural Name of a people (varia lectio kont-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ketalikīrtim. Name of the author of the work megha-mālā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khakuntalam. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khaṭvātale locative case ind. under the bedstead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kontalafor kaunt- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
krīḍārasātalan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtahastatalf. dexterity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. marked, stamped, branded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. (a-k-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. noted for good qualities, excellent, amiable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. stigmatized View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. caused by (in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. relating to (in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇacaused by, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalakṣaṇam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtalavaṇan. factitious salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣamātalan. the surface of the earth, ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣauṇītalan. the surface of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣiptalaguḍamfn. one who flings the staff View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣititalan. the surface of the earth, ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣititalāpsarasf. an apsaras- who walks or lives on the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣmātalan. the surface of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-). ) the hair of the head, lock of hair etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. a particular head-dress View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. a drinking cup View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. a plough View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. barley View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. a kind of perfume (equals hrīvera-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. (in music) a certain dhruvaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. plural Name of a people etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalam. a prince of that people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalasvātikarṇam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalavardhanam. the plant Eclipta prostrata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalikāf. a species of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalikāf. butter knife or scoop View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuntalośīran. a perfume View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusumitalatā f. Name of a metre consisting of four lines of eighteen syllables each. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusumitalatāvellikāf. Name of a metre consisting of four lines of eighteen syllables each. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kūṭaghaṭitalakṣaṇan. Name (also title or epithet) of a nyāya- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kūṭasaṃghaṭitalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lakṣitalakṣaṇamfn. having the marks (of anything) perceived or evident View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitalalitamfn. excessively beautiful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitalocanamf(ā-)n. beautiful-eyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitalocanāf. Name of a daughter of the vidyā-dhara- vāma-datta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lambhitalobhamfn. one who has a desire of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
liṅgopahitalaiṅgikabhānanirāsarahasyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
liṅgopahitalaiṅgikabhānavicāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
liṅgopahitalaiṅgikavādārtham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lohitalavaṇan. red salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahātalan. Name of the 6th of the 7 lower worlds or regions under the earth inhabited by the nāga-s etc. (See pātāla-) etc. () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahītalan. the surface of the earth, ground, soil etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahītalavisarpinm. "earth-walker", an inhabitant of the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talim. Name of indra-'s charioteer
talīm. (only Nominal verb sg. li- according to to from lin-) Name of a divine being associated with yama- and the pitṛ-s (see mātāli-, column 3) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talisārathim. "having mātali- for his charioteer", Name of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talīyamfn. relating to or concerning mātali- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matalf. anything excellent etc. (equals prec.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matallikāf. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') anything excellent of its kind (exempli gratia, 'for example' go-m-,"an excellent cow") gaRa matallikādi- () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
matallikāf. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talyupākhyānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛdutaruṇahustapādatalatāf. having the palms and soles of the feet soft and tender (one of the 32 signs of perfection) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muhūrtalakṣaṇapaṭalamn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muktalajjamfn. casting away shame View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
munipittalan. copper. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nabhastalan. "sky-surface", firmament etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nabhastalan. Name of the 10th solar mansion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naitalamfn. (fr. ni-tala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naitalasadmann. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nātivātalamfn. not too much producing wind (in the body) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nīlakuntalāf. Name of a female friend of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nimnatalaSee ninda-t-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nindatalamfn. equals nindita-hasta-, having a maimed hand (also nimna-t- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirghātalakṣaṇan. Name of 60 pariśiṣṭa-s of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nistalamfn. not flat, round, globular View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nistalamfn. trembling, moving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nistalamfn. down, below View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nitalan. one of the 7 divisions of the lower regions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivṛttalaulyamfn. whose desire is averted from, not desirous of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādatalan. sole of the foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādatalāhatif. a kick View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādataleind. (to fall) at a person's foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paittalamf(ī-)n. (fr. pittala-) made of brass, brazen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pakvaharitalūnamfn. cut (grain), ripe but not dry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇitalan. the palm of the hand, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇitalan. a particular weight (= 2 tolaka-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇitalam. (in music) a particular measure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇītalan. a particular measure (equals pāṇi-t-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paratalpam. plural another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paratalpagāminm. one who approaches another's wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāratalpikan. (-talpa-) adultery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pātālatalan. the bottom of pātāla- ( pātālatalam lam- ind.down to pātāla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pātālatalamind. pātālatala
talyan. dual number a particular part of a carriage (= kīlaka- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pattalāf. equals paṭṭalā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pattalakam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pattalīkṛ(for pattr-?) -kṛ-, to beat into thin leaves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṭṭatalpam. a silken bed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
phaṇitalpagam. "resorting to a serpent as a couch", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
piśitalocanamfn. having fleshy eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. yellow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. yellow colour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talan. brass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talakan. brass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talohayellow metal, queen's metal or a mixed metal resembling gold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pittalamf(ā-)n. bilious, secreting bile (gaRa sidhmādi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pittalāf. Jussiaea Repens View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pittalan. brass, bell-metal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pittalan. Betula Bhojpatra (its bark is used for writing upon; see bhūrja-pattra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pittalīf. Sanseviera Roxburghiana View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
potalam. or n. Name of a seaport on the indu-s (= ;later applied to the residence of the Dalai Lama in Lhassa) (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
potalakam. or n. Name of a mountain (equals potala-?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
potalakapriyam. "fond of the mountain potalaka-", Name of a buddha- or of a jina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
potalikāf. See go-potalikā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prākṛtalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prākṛtalaṅkesvaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāsādatalan. the flat roof of a house or palace View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratalam. the open hand with the fingers extended View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratalamn. one of the divisions of the lower regions (see pātāla-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pretalokam. the world of the dead (in which they remain for one year or until the śrāddha- ceremonies are completed) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pṛṣṭhatalpanan. the exterior muscles of an elephant's back View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pṛthivītalan. "earth-surface", ground, the terrestrial or infernal regions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pṛthvītalan. the ground, dry land View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purātalan. the region below the seven worlds (see talātala-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttalam. (prob. fr. putra-) a puppet, doll, small statue, effigy, image ( puttaladahana -dahana- n. puttalavidhāna -vidhāna- n.and puttalavidhi -vidhi- m.burning an effigy in place of the body of one who has died abroad) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttaladahanan. puttala
puttalakamf(ikā-). equals puttala-, - View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttalakam. liko- vidhiḥ- equals puttala-v- above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttalavidhānan. puttala
puttalavidhim. puttala
puttalīf. = m. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttalīf. an idol View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttalīcālanan. a particular game with dolls View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puttalīpūjāf. idol-worship, idolatry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktalāf. Sanseviera Roxburghiana View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktalāf. equals kākā/aanī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktalaśunam. a kind of garlic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktalocanam. "red-eyed", a pigeon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmaśītalāf. equals ārāma-śītalā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raṅgaplutalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasātalan. Name of one of the seven hells or regions under the earth etc. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasātalan. the lower world or hell in general (not to be confounded with naraka- or the place of punishment) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasātalan. the 4th astrological mansion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasātalan. the earth, ground, soil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasātalam. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasāyanāmṛtalauham. a particular medicinal preparation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratnatalpam. a couch adorned with jewels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
riptalepam. what sticks or adheres (to the hand) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahastatalamind. with clapping of hands, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakuntalāf. (said to be fr. śakunta-) Name of a daughter of the apsaras- menakā- by viśvāmitra- (she was supposed to have been born and left in a forest, where she was protected by birds till found by the sage kaṇva-, who took her to his hermitage and reared her as his daughter;she was there seen by king duṣyanta-, when on a hunting expedition, and married by him, and became the mother of bharata-, sovereign of all India;the story of duṣyanta-'s accidental meeting with śakuntalā-, their marriage, separation, his repudiation of her through temporary loss of memory caused by a curse, his subsequent recognition of her by means of a ring which was lost but afterwards recovered, forms the subject of kālidāsa-'s celebrated drama called abhijñāna-śakuntalā- q.v). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākuntalam. (fr. śakuntalā-) metron. of bharata- (sovereign of India as son of śakuntalā- and duṣyanta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākuntalan. (according to to some alsof(ā-).) equals next or the drama commonly called śakuntalā- or abhijñāna-śakuntalam- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakuntalātmaja(tm-) m. " śakuntalā-'s son", metron. of bharata- (sovereign of India) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākuntaleyam. metron. of bharata- (see above) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakuntalopākhyānan. "story of śakuntalā-", Name of and of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākuntalopākhyānan. the story of śakuntalā- and duṣyanta- (constituting the episode in ).
salilakuntalam. "water-hair", Vallisneria or Blyxa Octandra View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāptalambham. a particular high number View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samastalokam. the whole world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdīptalocanamfn. one who has inflamed or flashing eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃghatalam. equals saṃha-t- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃguptalekham. saṃguptārtha
saṃhatalam. the two hands joined with the open palms brought together (see saṃhata--and saṃgha-t-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhatatalam. the two hands joined with the open palms brought together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃjātalajjamfn. one who has become ashamed or embarrassed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śampātala wrong reading for śamyā-t- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃraktalocanamfn. having the eyes reddened (with passion or fury). () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddhatalāṅgūlamfn. (an animal) whose tail is raised or cocked up (varia lectio sam-un-nata-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samunnatalāṅgulamfn. having the tail erect (see sam-uddhata-l-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṅgatalam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṅkutalan. the base of a gnomon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntalābhamfn. that which has ceased to bear interest, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalam. Name of a man gaRa naḍādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalāf. Name of several plants (Arabian jasmine;a soap-tree;Mimosa Concinna;Abrus Precatorius;Bignonia Suaveolens), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalaf. equals nava-mālikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalaf. equals carma-kaśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalakṣaṇan. Name of various works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalakṣaṇabhāṣyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalakṣaṇamayamf(ī-)n. having 7 characteristic marks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāptalāyanam. patronymic fr. saptala- gaRa naḍādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāptaleyamfn. (fr. idem or 'm. patronymic fr. saptala- gaRa naḍādi-.') gaRa sakhy-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalikāf. a kind of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalokam. plural the 7 worlds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalokamayamf(ī-)n. constituting the 7 worlds (said of viṣṇu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptalokīf. the 7 divisions of the world, the whole earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaratalpam. a couch formed of arrow (especially for a dead or wounded warrior) (see -pañjara-, -śayana-, -śayyā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāratalpikamfn. (spoken by a dying warrior) from a bed of arrows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvaprāyaścittalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstrasiddhāntaleśasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstrasiddhāntaleśasaṃgrahasāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstrāvartalipif. a particular mode of writing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śātalāf. varia lectio for sātalā- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satalamfn. having a bottom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāf. equals saptalā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatalakṣan. a hundred lacs, ten millions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satalatramfn. having leather guards (used in archery) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śātaleyam. patronymic fr. śatala- gaRa śubhrādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatalocanamfn. hundred -eyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatalocanam. Name of one of skanda-'s attendants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatalocanam. of an asura- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatalumpa m. Name of the poet bhāravi- (see śatru-lummpa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatalumpakam. Name of the poet bhāravi- (see śatru-lummpa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saudhatalan. the flat roof of a plasterer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śayanatalagatamfn. gone to bed, lying in bed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śayanīyatalan. (the surface of) a bed or couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalaghukhamāṇikam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇan. Name of various works. (alsof(ā-).) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇadīdhitiṭīkāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇakroḍam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇapariṣkāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇaprakāśam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇarahasyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇaṭīkāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalakṣaṇavivekaprakaraṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntalavam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhāntaleśam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śilātalan. a slab of rock etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śilātalan. the surface of a rock View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sīmāntalekhāf. the utmost limit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sīmāntalekhāf. the extremity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siṃhāsanadvātriṃśatputtalikāvārttāf. Name of a work consisting of 32 stories in praise of vikramāditya- (= vikrama-carita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siṃhatalam. the open hands joined (cf. saṃha-t-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalamf(ā-)n. cold, cool, cooling etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalamf(ā-)n. shivering, frosty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalamf(ā-)n. cold id est free from passion, calm, gentle, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalamf(ā-)n. not exciting emotion, not causing painful feelings View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. (only ) the wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. Cordia Myxa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. Michelia Champaka View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. equals asana-parṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. a kind of camphor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. the resin of Shorea Robusta View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. green sulphate of iron (also m.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. bitumen (also m.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. a religious ceremony observed on the sun's entering Aries View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. (with jaina-s) Name of the 10th arhat- of the present avasarpiṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. See below View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalam. small-pox View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalan. cold, coldness, cold weather View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalan. sandal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalan. a lotus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalan. Costus Speciosus or Arabicus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalan. the root of Andropogon Muricatus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalan. a pearl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. (only ) sand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. Pistia Stratiotes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. equals kuṭumbinī- and ārāma-śītalā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. a red cow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. small-pox View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāf. the goddess inflicting small-pox (see compound and ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalacchadam. a white leaf View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalacchadamfn. having white leaves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalacchadam. Michelia Champaka View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītaladīkṣitam. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāgaurīpūjāvidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalajalan. cold water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalajalan. a lotus flower
śītalakam. marjoram View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalakan. a white lotus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalapattrikāf. Maranta Dichotoma View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalapradamfn. giving or producing coolness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalapradam. (or n. ) sandal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāprakaraṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalaprasādam. Name of a person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāpūjāf. worship of the goddess śītalā- (a festival on the 8th day of the second half of the month phālguna-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāpūjāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalasaptamīf. equals -śītala-s- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāsaptamīf. a festival kept on the 7th day of the light half of the month māgha- (in honour of the small-pox goddess, when only cold food is eaten) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalasparśamfn. cold to the touch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāṣṭakan. Name of work (ṣṭ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāstotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitalaśunagarlic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalasvāminm. Name of an arhat- with jaina-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalatāf. coldness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalatāf. insensibility View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitalatāf. a kind of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalataramfn. more cool, colder View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalatvan. coldness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalatvan. indifference, apathy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalavātam. a cool breeze, cold wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalavātakamfn. having cool breezes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalavātakam. the plant Marsilea Quadrifolia View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāvratan. a particular religious observance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāvratan. Name of a chapter of the skanda-purāṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalayaNom. P. yati-, to cool (trans.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalāyaNom. A1. yate-, to become cool, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalīf. Pistia Stratiotes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalīin compound for śītala-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalībhūP. -bhavati-, to become cold (also figuratively) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalījaṭāf. Villarsia Cristata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śītalīkṛP. -karoti-, to cool, make cold, das-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitalohitamfn. white and red View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitalohitam. white and red colour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śleṣmāpihitalocanamfn. having the eyes filled up with phlegm or slime, blear-eyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīkhaṇḍaśītalamfn. cool as sandal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrītalan. a particular hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīvatsamuktikanandyāvartalakṣitapāṇipādatalatāf. having the palms of the hands and soles of the feet marked with śrī-vatsa- and muktika- (for muktikā-?) and nandy-āvarta- (one of the 80 minor marks of a buddha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅgārāmṛtalaharīf. Name of a rhetoric work by sāma-rāja-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stavāmṛtalaharīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthitaliṅgamfn. having the virile member erected (see sthiral-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suguptalekham. a very private letter or one written in cipher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukhaśītalamfn. equals -śīta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sulalitalatāpallavamayamf(ī-)n. consisting of young sprouts of beautiful creepers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
supratiṣṭhitapāṇipādatalatāf. the having the palms of the hands and soles of the feet well (and equally) placed (one of the 32 signs of perfection) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suśītalamfn. very cold or cooling, frigid, freezing etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suśītalan. coldness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suśītalan. white sandal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suśītalan. a kind of fragrant grass (equals gandha-tṛṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutalan. ( also m.)"great depth" , the second of the seven divisions of the regions under the earth (see loka-, pātāla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutalam. the base or foundation of a large building (equals aṭṭālikā-bandha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutalpan. a beautiful couch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvitalam. a particular form of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayamīhitalabdhamfn. gained by one's own effort View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetalodhram. a kind of lodhra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetalohitam. Name of a muni- (a pupil of śveta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetapītalam. yellow-whiteness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetapītalamf(ā-)n. yellow-white View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taitala lāyani-, li- See til-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tanūtalam. a measure of length equal to the arms extended, fathom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taptalohan. "glowing iron", Name of a hell (see ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taptalomaśagreen vitriol View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tarutalan. the level ground round the foot of a tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. a fatherly relative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. hot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. an iron club View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. disease View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. cooking, maturing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamfn. heat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
totalam. Name of a writer on med. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
totalāf. Name of a goddess (tott-?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tottalāf. equals totalā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
trotalan. Name of a tantra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
trotalan. see toḍala-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
trotalottaran. another tantra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tyaktalajjamfn. abandoning shame, shameless View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmattaliṅginmfn. feigning madness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uparitalan. the upper surface View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upatalpamind. upon the turret, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upatalpyam. a kind of wooden seat or stool on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
urvītalan. the surface of the earth, ground, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpātalakṣaṇan. Name (also title or epithet) of the 64th Paris3. of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidyāmṛtalaharīf. vaidyāmṛta
vartalohan. a sort of brass or steel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasantalatā () f. Name of women. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasantalatikā() f. Name of women. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasantalekhā() f. Name of women. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasantavitalam. Name of a form of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśātalam. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasudhātalan. the surface of the earth, the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasudhātalan. the ground, soil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamf(ā-)n. windy, stormy (equals vātula-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamf(ā-)n. flatulent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talam. a sort of pulse, Cicer Arietinum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talāf. (with or scilicet yoni-) a morbid state of the uterus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talamaṇḍalīf. a whirlwind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vigalitalajjamfn. free from shame, bold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vigatalakṣaṇamf(ā-)n. "devoid of good or lucky marks", unfortunate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vihāyasastalan. vihāyas
vikṛtalocanamfn. having troubled eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikuñcitalalāṭabhṛtmfn. having a scowling brow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viparītalakṣaṇāf. ironical description of an object by mentioning its contrary properties View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipatitalomanmfn. one whose hair has fallen out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viplutalocanamfn. having the eyes suffused or bathed (with tears, joy etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇubhaktalakṣaṇan. Name of a part of the mahā-bhārata-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇusiddhāntalīlāvatīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitalan. Name of one of the seven hells (see pātāla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitalan. depth of hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitalalokam. the world or lower region of vitala- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratalopam. violation of a vow or religious obligation (see snātak/av-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratalopanan. idem or 'm. violation of a vow or religious obligation (see snātak/av-).' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vrataluptamf(ā-)n. one who has broken a vow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣatalan. the foot of a tree or the ground about it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāghratalam. a red variety of the castor-oil plant (see -dala-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyaktalakṣmanmfn. having evident sings or marks, clearly characterized View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyaktalavaṇamfn. much salted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyālolakuntalakalāpavatmfn. having dishevelled locks of hair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
talarāyam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yogatalpan. " yoga--couch" equals -nidrā- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
Apte Search
58 results
tal तल् 1 P., 1 U. (तलति, तालयति-ते) 1 To be full or complete. -2 To fix, found, establish. -3 To be fixed. -4 To accomplish a vow.
talācī तलाची A mat.
talaḥ तलः लम् [तल्-अच्] 1 A surface; भुवस्तलमिव व्योम कुर्वन् व्योमेव भूतलम् R.4.29; sometimes used at the end of comp. without much alteration of meaning; महीतलम् 'surface of the earth' i. e. earth itself; शुद्धे तु दर्पणतले सुलभावकाशा Ś.7.32; नभस्तलम् &c. -2 The palm of the hand; R.6.18. -3 The sole of the foot; Bhāg.1.36. 8. -4 The fore-arm. -5 A slap with the hand. -6 Lowness, inferiority of position. -7 A lower part, part underneath, base, foot, bottom; रेवारोधसि वेतसीतरुतले चेतः समुत्कण्ठते K. P.1. -8 (Hence) The ground under a tree or any other object, shelter afforded by anything; फणी मयूरस्य तले निषीदति Ṛs.1.13. -9 A hole, pit. -1 A span. -लः 1 The hilt of a sword. -2 The palmyra tree. -3 N. of Śiva. -4 Pressing the strings of a lute with the left hand; तत्र तत्र महानादैरुत्कृष्टतलनादितैः Mb.1.221.6. -5 A division of hell. -लम् 1 A pond. -2 A forest, wood; भस्मप्रस्तरशायी च भूमिशय्या तलेषु च Mb.12.33.11. -3 Cause, origin, motive. -4 A leathern fence worn round the left arm (तला also in this sense); उद्यतैरायुधैश्चित्रास्तलबद्धाः कलापिनः Mb.6.16.14. -Comp. -अङ्गुलिः f. a toe. -अतलम् the fourth of the seven divisions of hell; Bhāg.2.5.41. -ईक्षणः a hog. -उदर a. having a protuberant belly, pot-bellied. -उदरी f. A wife; L. D. B. -उदा a river. -घातः a slap with the palm of the hand. -तालः 1 a kind of musical instrument. -2 clapping of the hands. -त्रम्, -त्राणम्, -वारणम् a leathern glove of an archer; शरासन- ज्यातलवारणध्वनिः Ki.14.29; पाणयः सतलत्राश्च... Śiva B.12.8. -प्रहारः a slap with the hand. -बद्धः a. having fastened round one's arm the तल (त्र); Mb.6.16.14. -युद्धम् a fight with the palms of the hands. -लोकः nether world (पाताल); Bhāg.2.6.42. -सारकम् 1 a martingale. -2 a horse's food-receptacle; M. W. -सारणम्, -सारिका ibid. -हृदयम् the centre of the sole of foot.
talakam तलकम् A large pond. -कः A small cart with burning coals (Mar. शेगडी); Hch.7.
talataḥ तलतः ind. From the bottom.
talavaḥ तलवः A musician (playing with palms on the instrument); Vāj.3.2. -कारः (pl.) N. of a school of the सामवेद. ˚ब्राह्मणम्, ˚उपनिषद् other names for जैमिनीय ब्राह्मण and उपनिषद्.
talavāraṇam तलवारणम् A sword.
talikā तलिका A martingale.
talimam तलिमम् 1 Paved ground, a pavement. -2 A bed, cot, couch. -3 An awning. -4 A large sword or knife.
talina तलिन a. [तल्-इनन् Uṇ.2.53] 1 Thin, meagre, spare. -2 Small, little. -3 Clear, clean. -4 Situated under or beneath. -5 Weak. -6 Separate. -7 Fine, very thin; क्षोणीकान्तमृणालतन्तुतलिनास्ताम्यन्ति तारापतेः Vikr.11.8. -8 Covered with; Vikr.14.61. -नम् A bed, couch. -उदरी a. a slender-waisted woman; स्नानावसाने तलिनोदरीणामकृत्रिमं मण्डनमाविरासीत् Vikr.1.88.
talit तलित् f. Lightning; cf. तडित्.
talita तलित a. 1 Fixed, having a bottom. -2 Fried. -तम् Fried meat.
talkam तल्कम् A forest.
tallaḥ तल्लः A reservoir, tank. -ल्ली 1 A youthful woman. -2 N. of the wife of Varuṇa. -3 A boat. -ल्लम् A pit, hole.
tallajaḥ तल्लजः 1 Excellence, superiority, happiness. -2 (At the end of comp.) Excellent (in this sense the word is always masculine, whatever be the gender of the first member of the compound); गोतल्लजः 'an excellent cow'; so कुमारीतल्लजः 'an excellent maiden'.
tallikā तल्लिका A key.
talpaḥ तल्पः ल्पम् [तल्-पक् Uṇ.3.28] 1 A couch, bed, sofa; सपदि विगतनिद्रस्तल्पमुज्झाञ्चकार R.5.75 'left the bed', 'rose'. -2 (Fig.) A wife (as in गुरुतल्पग q. v.); Chān. Up.5.1.9. -3 The seat of a carriage. -4 An upper storey, a turret, tower; विशीर्णतल्पादृशतो निवेशः पर्यस्तशालः प्रभुणा विना मे R.16.11. -5 A guard, one who protects; तल्पैश्चाभ्यासिकैर्युक्त शुशुभे योधरक्षितम् Mb.1.27.34 (तल्पैः रक्षिभिः पुरुषैः com.) -6 (with अधिगम्) Sexual intercourse; श्राद्धभुग् वृषलीतल्पं तदहर्यो$धिगच्छति Ms.3.25. -ल्पा A couch bed; तल्पा नः सुशेवा Av.13.1.17. -Comp. -कीटः a bug.
talpakaḥ तल्पकः One whose business is to make or prepare beds (as a servant).
talpalam तल्पलम् The back-bone of an elephant (पृष्ठवंश); सान्द्रत्वक्कास्तल्पलाश्लिष्टकक्षाः Śi.18.6.
talpanam तल्पनम् 1 The exterior muscles of an elephant's back. -2 The flesh on the back-bone.
taluna तलुन a. [तल्-उनन्] Young. -नः 1 A youth. -2 Wind, air. -नी A girl, young woman
talvam तल्वम् Scent produced from the rubbing of fragrant substances.
atala अतल a. Bottomless. -लम् [अस्य भूखण्डस्य तलं पृषो˚ इदमो$त्वम्] N. of a पाताल or lower region, one of the 7 Pātālas, being the first among them. -लः N. of Śiva. -Comp. -स्पृशू -स्पर्श a. [न. तले स्पृश्यते कर्मणि क्विप्; न तलस्य स्पर्शो यत्र] bottomless, very deep, unfathomable.
uttalita उत्तलित Thrown or cast upwards.
upatalpaḥ उपतल्पः An upper story, a room on the top of a house. -2 A kind of wooden seat or stool.
kaṭītalaḥ कटीतलः A crooked sword.
talaḥ कातलः A large species of fish.
kuntalaḥ कुन्तलः 1 The hair of the head, a lock of hair; प्रतनुविरलैः प्रान्तोन्मीलन्मनोहरकुन्तलैः U.1.2. Ch. P.4,6; Gīt.2. -2 A drinking cup. -3 A plough. -4 Barley. -5 A kind of perfume. -लाः (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants. -Comp. -उशीरम् a perfume.
kuntalikā कुन्तलिका A butter-knife.
gaurutalpikaḥ गौरुतल्पिकः The violator of the preceptor's bed.
ghṛtalī घृतली A cock-roach.
tala तातल a. 1 Paternal. -2 Hot. -लः 1 A disease. -2 An iron club or spike. -3 Cooking, maturing. -4 Heat. -5 A relative who may be regarded as a father.
nitalam नितलम् One of the seven divisions of the lower regions; see पाताल.
nindatala निन्दतल a. Having a maimed hand.
naitalam नैतलम् The lower or infernal regions. -Comp. -सद्मन् m. Yama (Pluto); जेतुर्नैतलसद्मनो$पि तपसा दीप्तस्य राज्ञः सतः (v. l. for वैतल) Mv.5.18.
pāratalpikam पारतल्पिकम् Adultery.
pittala पित्तल a. Bilious. -लम् 1 Brass. -2 A species of birch tree.
tala पीतल a. Yellow. -लः The yellow colour. -लम् Brass.
talakam पीतलकम् Brass.
puttalaḥ पुत्तलः ली 1 An image, idol, a statue, effigy. -2 A doll, puppet. -Comp. -दहनम्, -विधिः burning an effigy in place of the body of one who has died abroad or whose corpse is lost. -पूजा idolatry. पुत्तलकः puttalakḥ पुत्तलिका puttalikā पुत्तलकः पुत्तलिका A doll &c.
paittala पैत्तल a. (-ली f.) Made of brass, brazen.
pratalam प्रतलम् One of the seven divisions of the lower world; see पाताल. -लः The open hand with the fingers extended.
matallikā मतल्लिका A word used at the end of nouns to donate 'excellence or anything best of its kind'; गोमतल्लिका 'an excellent cow'; परिलसत्तृणशून्यमतल्लिका Rām. Ch. 4.32; cf. उद्धः.
matal मतल्ली See मतल्लिका.
taliḥ मातलिः N. of the charioteer of Indra. -Comp. -सारथिः an epithet of Indra.
tala वातल a. (-ली f.) [वातं रोगमेदं लाति ला-क] 1 Stormy, windy. -2 Flatulent. -लः 1 Wind. -2 The chickpea (चणक). -Comp. -मण्डली A whirl-wind. -योनिः (वातला- योनिः) a morbid state of the uterus.
vitalam वितलम् The second of the seven lower regions under the earth; see पाताल or लोक.
śakuntalā शकुन्तला [शकुन्तैः लायते ला घञर्थे क] N. of the daughter of Viśvāmitra by the nymph Menakā who was sent down by Indra to disturb the sage's austerities. [When Menakā went up to the heaven she left the child in a solitary forest where she was taken care of by 'Śakuntas' or birds, whence she was called "Śakuntalā". She was afterwards found by the sage Kaṇva and brought up as his own daughter. When Duṣyanta in the course of his hunting came to the sage's hermitage, he was fascinated by her charms and prevailed on her to become his wife by the Gandharva form of marriage; (see Duṣyanta). She bore to him a son named Bharata, who became a universal monarch, and gave his name to India which came to be called Bharatavarsa.]
śāratalpikaḥ शारतल्पिकः (from शरतल्प) The epithet of Bhīṣma; शान्तिपर्वणि धर्माश्च व्याख्याताः शारतल्पिकाः Mb.1.2.326.
śītala शीतल a. [शीतं लाति ला-क, शीतमस्त्यस्य लच्-वा] 1 (a) Cool, cold, chill, frigid; अतिशीतलमप्यम्भः किं भिनत्ति न भूभृतः Subhāṣ. (b) Cool, bearable; महदपि परदुःखं शीतलं सम्यगाहुः V.4.13. -2 Not exciting, calm, gentle. -लः 1 The moon. -2 A kind of camphor. -3 Turpentine. -4 The Champaka tree. -5 A kind of religious observance (observed upon the sun's entering the sign Aries). -लम् 1 Cold, coolness. -2 The cold season. -3 Benzoin. -4 White sandal, or sandal in general. -5 A pearl. -6 Green sulphate of iron. -7 A lotus. -8 The root called वीरण q. v. -Comp. -छदः the Champaka tree. -जलम् a lotus. -प्रदः, -दम् sandal. -वातः a cool breeze. -षष्ठी the sixth day of the bright half of Māgha.
śītalakam शीतलकम् A white lotus.
śītalā शीतला 1 Small-pox. -2 The goddess presiding over small-pox. -3 Sand. -4 Pistia Stratiotes (आरामशीतला, कुटुम्बिनी). -Comp. -पूजा worship of the goddess Śītalā (on the 8th day of the second half of फाल्गुन). -सप्तमी a festival on the 7th day of the light half of माघ.
śītalī शीतली Small-pox.
saṃhatalaḥ संहतलः The two hands with extended fingers joined together (= संघतलः).
satalikaḥ सतलिकः Pease.
sattalikā सत्तलिका A carpet; Kau. A.2.11.
saptalā सप्तला A kind of jasmine (double jasmine).
talā सातला 1 See सप्तला. -2 A soap-tree (Mar. शिकेकाई).
Macdonell Vedic Search
11 results
amartya á-martya, a. (K.) immortal, viii. 48, 12; f. ā, x. 127, 2.
amrta a-mṛ́ta, a. immortal; m. immortal being, i. 35, 2; vii. 63, 5; viii. 48, 32; n. what is immortal, i. 35, 6; x. 90, 3; immortality, x. 129, 2 [not dead, mṛtá, pp. of mṛ die; cp. Gk. ἄμβροτος ‘immortal’].
amṛtatva amṛta-tvá, n. immortality, x. 90, 2.
āyu āy-ú, a. active; m. living being, mortal, iii. 59, 9 [i go].
jalpi jálp-i, f. idle talk, chatter, viii. 48, 14 [jalp chatter].
marta már-ta, m. mortal, iii. 59, 2 [Gk. μορ-τό-ς, βρο-τό-ς ‘mortal’, Lat. mor-ta ‘goddess of death’].
martya márt-ya, a. mortal; m. mortal man, i. 35, 2; vii. 61, 1; 71, 2; viii. 48, 1. 3. 12; x. 15, 7.
talī Má̄talī, m. a divine being, x. 14, 3.
vrṣan vṛ́ṣ-an, m. bull, i. 85, 7. 12; 154, 3. 6; ii. 33, 13; 35, 13; iv. 50, 6; v. 83, 6 (with áśva = stallion); vii. 61, 5; 71, 6; stallion, vii. 71, 3 [Av. arz̆an, Gk. ἔρσην].
vrṣavrāta vṛ́ṣa-vrāta, a. (Bv.) having mighty hosts, i. 85, 4 [vṛ́ṣan bull, stallion].
svadhā 2. sva-dhá̄, f. own power, x. 129, 2; energy, x. 129, 5; vital force, ii. 35, 7; bliss, i. 154, 4 [svá ownand dhā put; cp. Gk. ἔ-θο-ς ‘custom’].
Macdonell Search
34 results
tala m. n. surface, plane; sole (foot), palm (hand); flat space below; --°ree; often not to be translated: lc.=at, on, under (--°ree; or g.); -tas, ad. from the bottom; -prahâra, m. slap; blow with the paw; -loka, m. lower regions.
talātala n. N. of a hell (bottom less at the bottom).
talava m. musician: -kâra, m. pl. N. of a school of the Sâma-veda: -½upanishad, f. T. of an Upanishad.
talima n. floor.
talina a. thin, slender; covered with (--°ree;).
talpa m. couch, bed: -m adhi-gam, have sexual intercourse with (--°ree;); turret; -ga, a. having sexual intercourse with (--°ree;); violating the bed of (--°ree;); -ga, a. born in the nuptial couch.
talpala m. fleshy ridge on an ele phant's back.
talpīkṛta pp. turned into a bed.
talpya a. belonging to the bed; born in the nuptial bed.
akṛtalakṣaṇa a. having no distinctive mark.
atala n. N. of a hell (bottomless).
adhastala n. surface --, space below (--°ree;).
adhitalpam ad. upon the towers.
abhūtalasparśa a. not touch ing the earth: -tâ, f. abst. n.
urvītala n. surface of the earth, earth; -dhara, m. mountain; -pati, m. king; -bhug, m. id.; -bhrit, m. mountain; -ruha, a. sprung from the earth; m. tree.
karatala n. palm of the hand: -ga ta, pp. held in the hand, -tâla, clapping of the hands; -da, a. paying taxes, tributary; subordinate; -dhrita-sara, a. holding an arrow in his hand; -pattra, n. saw; -pallava, m. finger; -pâda-danta, m. hand, foot, or tooth; -pâla, m. receiver-general of taxes; -putî, f. hollowed hand; -prâpta, pp. held in the hand; -badara, n. jujube berry in the hand=perfectly obvious matter; -bha, m.elephant's trunk; camel; young elephant or camel; hand between wrist and fingers: -ka, m. N. of a messenger; -bhûshana, n. bracelet; -bha½urû, a. f. having thighs like an elephant's trunk.
kuntala m. hair of the head; m. pl. N. of a people.
khaṭvātala n. space under a bed: lc. under the bed.
gabhastala n. kind of hell.
upatalpam ad. upon the towers.
tarutala n. flat space under a tree; -tâ, f. condition of a tree; -mandapa, arbour, bower; -mûla, n. root of a tree; -vallî, f. creeper; -shanda, n. group of trees.
nabhastala n. sky-surface, nether sky, vault of heaven.
naitala a. relating to the hell Nitala(?).
bhūtala n. surface of the earth, ground, earth.
matallikā f. --°ree; paragon of a, splendid, excellent; -î, f. id.
talin m. (only nm. -î; suffix -in is otherwise almost invariably accented) N. of a divine being abiding with Yama and the Fathers.
tali m. N. of Indra's charioteer: -sârathi, m. (having Mâtali for his cha rioteer), ep. of Indra.
tala a. windy, airy; promoting wind (as a bodily humour).
śaratalpa m. couch formed of arrows.
śākuntala m. son of Sakuntalâ, met. of Bharata; n. story of Sakuntalâ; T. of a well-known play by Kâlidâsa.
śītalasparśa a. cold to the touch.
śītalaya den. P. cool.
śītala a. cool, cold, frigid, cooling; free from passion (rare); gentle, mild (per son); not affecting the feelings (misfortune); n. cold, coolness: -tâ, f. coldness.
saptalokī f. the seven continents, the whole earth; (á)-vadhri, a. bound with seven cords (the soul; P.); m. N. of a man rescued by the Asvins (V.); -varsha, a. seven years old; -vârshika, a. (î) id.;-vimsá, a. twenty-seventh; consisting of twenty-seven; -vimsat, f. twenty-seven; (á)-vimsati, f. twenty-seven (w. app., g., --°ree;); (á)-vidha, a. sevenfold, of seven kinds; -satî, f. seven hun dred; -sapta-ta, a. seventy-seventh; -sap tati, f. seventy-seven: vatsare sapta-sap tatau, in the seventy-seventh year; -sapti, a. having seven steeds; m. sun.
Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects
34 results5 results
talāśa Is the name of a tree in the Atharvaveda. Whitney suggests that it may be the same as tālīśa (Flacourtia cata- phracta).
talava In the list of victims at the Purusamedha, or human sacrifice, in the Yajurveda, denotes a ‘musician’ of some kind.
talpa Is the regular term for ‘ bed ’ or ‘ couch ’ from the Rigveda and the Atharvaveda onwards. One made of Udum­bara wood is mentioned in the Taittirīya Brāhmana. The violation of the bed of a Guru, or teacher, is already mentioned in the Chāndogya Upanisad, while the adjective talpya, ‘born in the nuptial couch,’ denotes ‘legitimate’ in the śatapatha Brāhmana.
talya Is found in one passage of the Rigveda meaning some part of the chariot. What it was is quite uncertain. Hopkins suggests that, as in the Epic, it was possibly a piece of wood on the axle to hold the pole of the car.
śakuntalā Is the name of an Apsaras who bore Bharata, according to the śatapatha Brāhmaṇa, at Nādapit. Weber doubtfully reads the latter word as Nādapitī, an epithet of śakuntalā.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
34 results5 results6 results
talāśā vṛkṣāṇām iva AVś.6.15.3c.
talīdyam avatiṣṭhati AVś.7.76.3b.
talpeje talpa uttuda TA.4.39.1b.
āpādatalamastakam # TA.10.11.2b; MahānU.11.11b.
devatal devakośāḥ kveha # AVP.13.8.1a.
talī kavyair yamo aṅgirobhiḥ # RV.10.14.3a; AVś.18.1.47a; TS.2.6.12.5a; MS.4.14.6a: 243.4; AB.3.37.11; Aś.5.20.6. Ps: mātalī kavyaiḥ TB.2.6.16.2; śś.8.6.13.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"tal" has 160 results
taltad, affix त (l) added in the sense of collection (समूह) to the words ग्राम, जन, बन्धु and सहाय and गज also, exempli gratia, for example ग्रामता, जनता et cetera, and others; (2) added in the sense of 'the nature of a thing' ( भाव ) along with the affix त्व optionally, as also optionally along with the affixes इमन्, ष्यञ् et cetera, and others given in P. V. 1.122 to 136; e. g. अश्वत्वम्, अश्वता; अपतित्वम्, अपतिता; पृथुत्वम्, पृथुता, प्रथिमा; शुक्लता, शुक्लत्वम्, शौक्ल्यम्, शुक्लिमा; et cetera, and others, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.119 to 136. Words ending with the affix तल् are always declined in the feminine gender with the feminine. affix अा ( टाप् ) added to then; confer, compare तलन्तः (शब्दः स्त्रियाम् ), Linganusasana 17.
itthaṃbhūtalakṣaṇacharacterization; indication by a mark: e. g. जटाभिस्तापसः confer, compare इत्थंभूतलक्षणे च ( तृतीया ) P. II.3.21.
bhaktaltaddhita affix. affix भक्त applied to the words भौरिकि and others in the sense of 'a place of residence;' confer, compare P. IV. 2.54.
saṃnipātalakṣaṇaan operation which is characterized by the relationship between two words or two phonetic elements. See संनिपातपरिभाषा a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
saṃyogāntalopathe elision of the final of the conjunct consonants when they are at the end of a word provided they are not formed of र् as the first member and any consonant except स् as the second member: e.gगोमान्, ऊर्क् et cetera, and others; confer, compare संयोगान्तस्य लोपः,रात्सस्य P.VIII.2.23,24.
aṃ(ं)nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the vowel preceding it. confer, compare स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (l) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14 ; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम् ) which is changed into anusvāra in which case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while, it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्). confer, compare P. VIII.4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g(ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)1.22 V.Pr.14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prkrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.
akṣarasamāmnāyaalphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 | sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ,ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.
agrathe original Samhita text as opposed to pratṛṇna ( प्रतृण्ण ) or padapāṭha, (पदपाठ) which is the recital of separate words.
anaḍ(1)substitute अन् as Samāsānta at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound in the feminine for the last letter of the word ऊधस् and for that of धनुस् in all genders exempli gratia, for example कुण्डोघ्नी (by applying ई to कुण्डोधन्), शार्ङ्गधन्वा, अधिज्यधन्वा; confer, compare P V.4.131, 132; (2) substitute अन् for the last letter of the words अस्थि, दधि et cetera, and others before the affixes of the instrumental and the following cases beginning with a vowel e. g. अस्थ्ना, दध्ना, अक्ष्णा et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 1.75; (3) substitute अन् for the last letter of the word सखि, of words ending in ऋ,as also of उशनस् and others before the nominative singular. affix सु. e. g. सखा, कर्ता, उशना confer, compare P. VII.1.93, 94.
anavayavaliterally having no parts; impartite; without any concern with the individual component parts; application in totality; confer, compare सिद्धं तु धर्मोपदेशने अनवयवविज्ञानाद्यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु P. VI. 1.84 Vārt 5 and the Bhāṣya thereon; अस्मिञ् शास्त्रे अनवयवेन शास्त्रार्थसंप्रत्ययः स्यात् । a rule in grammar applies to all cases where its application is possible; it cannot be said to have its purpose served by applying to a few cases only.
aniṭ(1)not admitting the augment इट् to be prefixed to it; the term is strictly to be applied to ārdhadhātuka affixes placed after such roots as have their vowel characterized by a grave accent ( अनुदात्तस्वर ); the term अनिट् being explained as अनिडादि qualifying the अार्धधातुक affix; (2) in a secondary way, it has become customary to call such roots अनिट् as do not allow the augment इट् to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. Such roots are termed अनुदात्त verily because they are possessed of an anudātta vowel. e. g. कृ, भृ, जि, गम् , हन् et cetera, and others as against भु, धू, तॄ, श्वि, वृ, वद्, फल्, चल्, et cetera, and others which have their vowel characterized by an acute (उदात्त ) accent. For a complete list of such roots see the well-known stanzas given in the Siddhāntakaumudī incidentally on अात्मनेपदेष्वनतः P. VII.1.5. ऊदॄदन्तैर्यौतिरुक्ष्णुशीङ्स्नु....निहताः स्मृताः ॥ १ ॥ शक्लृपच्मुचिरिचवच्विच् .........धातवो द्व्यधिकं शतम् ॥ as also some lists by ancient grammarians given in the Mahābhāṣya on एकाच उपदेशेनुदात्तात्. P. VII. 2.10 or in the Kāśikā on the same rule P. VII.2.10.
anukramaright or regular order in a Vedic recital, called क्रम. e. g. वायव: स्थ.
abhikramathe first of the two utterances of a word which characterise the krama method of recital; e. g in the krama recital of प्रण इन्दो et cetera, and others प्र णः । न इन्दो । the first recial प्र णः is called अभिक्रम, or प्रथमवचन while न इन्दो is called द्वितीयवचनः confer, compare अभिक्रमे पूर्वविधानमाचरेत् पुनर्ध्रुवंस्तूत्तरकारितं क्रमे Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI.21.
abhyaṃkara(BHASKARASHASTRI Abhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. )an eminent scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who prepared a number of Sanskrit scholars in Grammar at Sātārā. He has also written a gloss on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another one on the Laghu-Śabdenduśekhara. (VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhyakar 863-1942 A. D.) a stalwart Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides writing several learned commentaries on books in several Sanskrit Shastras, has written a commentary named 'Tattvādarśa' on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another named 'Guḍhārthaprakāśa' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara. (KASHINATH VASUDEVA Abhyankar, 1890-) a student of Sanskrit Grammar who has written महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना-खण्ड, and जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compiled the परिभाषासंग्रह and the present Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.
avagraha(1)separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Padapāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitāpāṭha; exempli gratia, for example पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitāpāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originatedition The AtharvaPrātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are uttered separately, there is a momentary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utterance of a short vowel. (See for details Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded together. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; confer, compare also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; confer, compare छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.36); also confer, compare यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definitely stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coalescence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ exempli gratia, for example शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the constituent elements of a compound word are shown separately; confer, compare समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible.
avayavamember or portion, as opposed to the total or collection (समुदाय) which is called अवयविन्; confer, compare अवयवप्रसिद्धेः समुदायप्रसिद्धिर्बलीयसी Par.Śek. Pari. 98. The conventional sense is more powerful than the derivative sense.
(1)Pratyāhāra or a brief term standing for all vowels, semivowels, and the fifth, fourth and third of the class-consonants; all letters excepting the surds and sibilants; (2) substitute अ for the word इदम् before affixes of cases beginning with the instrumental, and for एतद् before the taddhita affix. affixes त्र and तस्; see P.II.4.32 and 33; (3) substitute अ for the genitive case singular. case-affix ङस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद्; see P.VII.1.27.
aśvādi(1)a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the affix फञ्(अायन) is added in the sense of गोत्र (grandchildren et cetera, and others); exempli gratia, for exampleआश्वायनः जातायनः, औत्सायनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.1. 110; (2) a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the taddhita affix यत् is added in the sense of a cause of the type of a meeting or an accidental circumstance; exempli gratia, for example आश्विकम् अाश्मिकम् confer, compare P. V.1.39.
aṣṭādhyāyīname popularly given to the Sūtrapāṭha of Pāṇini consisting of eight books (adhyāyas) containing in all 3981 Sūtras,as found in the traditional recital, current at the time of the authors of the Kāśika. Out of these 398l Sūtras, seven are found given as Vārtikas in the Mahābhāṣya and two are found in Gaṇapāṭha.The author of the Mahābhāṣya has commented upon only 1228 of these 3981 sūtras. Originally there were a very few differences of readings also, as observed by Patañjali ( see Mbh on I.4.1 ); but the text was fixed by Patañjali which, with a few additions made by the authors of the Kāśika,as observed a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., has traditionally come down to the present day. The Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is believed to be one of the six Vedāṅga works which are committed to memory by the reciters of Ṛgveda. The text of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is recited without accents. The word अष्टाध्यायी was current in Patañjali's time; confer, compare शिष्टज्ञानार्था अष्टाध्यायी Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 3.109.
ānupūrvyasaṃhitāthe saṁhitā-pāṭha or recital of the running Vedic text in accordance with the constituent words;exempli gratia, for example शुनः शेपं चित् निदितम् or नरा शंसं वा पूषणम्, as opposed to the अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिता which is actually found in the traditional recital exempli gratia, for example शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितम् Ṛk saṁh. V 2.7 or नरा वा शंसं पूषणम् Ṛk saṁh. X.64.3. See R. Prāt. II 43.
ālactad-affix (आल्) applied to the word वाच् in the sense of 'talkative' exempli gratia, for example वाचालः; confer, compare P.V.2.124.
iṅgyaa separable word as opposed to अनिङ्ग्य; part of a compound word which is separated or may be separated from the remaining part when the word is split up into its constituent parts. Generally the word is applied to the first part of a compound word when it is split up in the recital of the padapāṭha. The 'iṅgya' word is shown by a pause or avagraha after it which is shown in writing by the sign (ऽ): confer, compare इङ्गयेत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् । इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा commentary on Tait. Prāt. 1.48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on T.Pr. I.48.
u(1)labial vowel standing for the long ऊ and protracted ऊ3 in Pāṇini's grammar unless the consonant त् is affixed to it, उत् standing for the short उ only: (2) Vikaraṇa affix उ of the 8th conjugation ( तनादिगण ) and the roots धिन्व् and कृण्व्;confer, compareP.III. 1.79-80; (3) substitute (उ) for the vowel अ of कृ,exempli gratia, for example कुरुतः, कृर्वन्ति before weak Sārvadhātuka affixes, confer, compareP.VI 4.110; (4) kṛt (affix). affix उ added to bases ending in सन् and the roots आशंस्, भिक्ष्, विद्, इष् as also to bases ending in क्यच् in the Vedic Literature,exempli gratia, for example चिकीर्षुः भिक्षुः, बिन्दुः,इच्छुः,सुम्नयु; confer, compare P. III. 2.168-170; (5) Uṅādi affix उ ( उण् ) e.g, कारुः, वायुः, साधुः, et cetera, and others; confer, compare Uṅādi I.1; (6) mute vowel उ added to the first letters of a class of consonants in Pāṇini's grammar to show the whole class of the five letters; exempli gratia, for example कु, चु, टु, तु, पु which stand for the Guttural, the palatal the lingual, the dental and the labial classes respectively; confer, compare also ष्टुना ष्टुः P.VIII.4.41(7) उ added to न् showing the consonant न् as nasalized n; cf, नुः V.Pr. III.133.
upasargapreposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.
upasthitaa word used father technically in the sense of the word इति which is used in the Krama and other recitals when Vedic reciters show separately the two words compounded together by uttering the compound word first, then the word इति and then the two compound words, exempli gratia, for example सुश्लोक ३ इति सु-श्लोक। विभावसो इति विभा-वसो. The Kāśikā defines the word उपस्थित as समुदायादवच्छिद्य पदं येन स्वरूपे अवस्थाप्यते तद् उपस्थितम् । इतिशब्दः । Kāś.on VI.1.129. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya explains the word rather differently, but in the same context.The word after which इति is placed is called upasthita exempli gratia, for example the word बाहू in बाहू इति or विभावसौ in विभावसो इति as contrasted with स्थित id est, that is the word without इति exempli gratia, for example बाहू or विभावसो, as also contrasted with स्थितोपस्थित id est, that is the whole word विभावसो इति विभाsवसो which is also called संहित or मिलित; (2) occurring, present; cf कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् . यत्र कार्यं तत्रोपस्थितं द्रष्टव्यम् । Par.Śek. Pari.3.
ediphthong vowel ए made up of अ and इ, and hence having कण्ठतालुस्थान as its place of origin. It has no short form according to Pāṇini. In cases where a short vowel as a substitute is prescribed for it in grammar, the vowel इ is looked upon as its short form. Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya has observed that followers of the Sātyamugri and Rāṇāyanīya branches of the Sāmaveda have short ए ( ऍ ) in their Sāmaveda recital and has given सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः सुतम् as illustrations; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1-48; as also the article on.
yamaa letter called यम which is uttered partly through the nose. A class consonant excepting the fifth, when followed by the fifth viz. ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न or म् , gets doubled in the Vedic recital, when the second of the doubled consonant which is coloured by the following nasal consonant is called यम. This यम letter is not independent. It necessarily depends upon the following nasal consonant and hence it is called अयोगवाह. The nasalization is shown in script as xx followed by the consonant; e. g. पलिक्क्नी, अगूग्रे, et cetera, and others The pronunciation of this yama or twin letter is seen in the Vedic recital only; confer, compare पलिक्कनी ... कखगघेभ्य; परे तत्सदृशा एव यमाः S. K. on P. VIII. 2.1. confer, compare कु खु गु घु इति यमाः विंशतिसंख्याका भवन्ति Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII.24.
kaṇṭhatālavyagutturo-palatal. The diphthongs ए and ऐ are called Kaṇṭhatālavya, as they are produced in the Kaṇṭhatalu-sthāna.
kartṛagent of an action, subject; name of a kāraka or instrument in general, of an action, which produces the fruit or result of an action without depending on any other instrument; confer, compare स्वतन्त्रः कर्ता P. I.4.54, explained as अगुणीभूतो यः क्रियाप्रसिद्धौ स्वातन्त्र्येण विवक्ष्यते तत्कारकं कर्तृसंज्ञं भवति in the Kāśikā on P.I. 4.54. This agent, or rather, the word standing for the agent, is put in the nominative case in the active voice (confer, compare P.I.4.54), in the instrumental case in the passive voice (cf P. II.3.18), and in the genitive case when it is connected with a noun of action or verbal derivative noun, (confer, compare P.II.3.65).
karṣaṇaextension; protraction, defined as kālaviprakarṣa by commentators; a peculiarity in the recital as noticed in the pronunciation of ट् when followed by च् , or ड् when followed by ज् exempli gratia, for example षट्चै; षड्जात. confer, compare Nār. Śik. I.7.19.
kātantraname of an important small treatise on grammar which appears like a systematic abridgment of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini. It ignores many unimportant rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many, and altogether omits the Vedic portion and the accent chapter of Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras in an order different from that of Pāṇini dividing the work into four adhyāyas dealing with technical terms, saṁdhi rules,declension, syntax compounds noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes ) conjugation, voice and verbal derivatives in an order. The total number of rules is 1412 supplemented by many subordinate rules or Vārttikas. The treatise is believed to have been written by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavarman or Śarva or Sarva, who is said to have lived in the reign of the Sātavāhana kings. The belief that Pāṇini refers to a work of Kalāpin in his rules IV. 3.108 and IV.3.48 and that Patañjali's words कालापम् and माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not much strength. The work was very popular especially among those who wanted to study spoken Sanskrit with ease and attained for several year a very prominent place among text-books on grammar especially in Bihar, Bengal and Gujarat. It has got a large number of glosses and commentary works, many of which are in a manuscript form at present. Its last chapter (Caturtha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vararuci. As the arrangement of topics is entirely different from Pāṇini's order, inspite of considerable resemblance of Sūtras and their wording, it is probable that the work was based on Pāṇini but composed on the models of ancient grammarians viz. Indra, Śākaṭāyana and others whose works,although not available now, were available to the author. The grammar Kātantra is also called Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra.. A comparison of the Kātantra Sūtras and the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Sūtras shows that the one is a different version of the other. The Kātantra Grammar is also called Kaumāra as it is said that the original 1nstructions for the grammar were received by the author from Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For details see Vol. VII Patañjala Mahābhāṣya published by the D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.
kārakaliterally doer of an action. The word is used in the technical sense ; 1 of ’instrument of action'; cf कारकशब्दश्च निमित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्थान्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः । क्रियायाः Kāś. on P.I. 4.23: confer, compare also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः । साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति । M.Bh. on P. I. 4.28. The word 'kāraka' in short, means 'the capacity in which a thing becomes instrumental in bringing about an action'. This capacity is looked upon as the sense of the case-affixes which express it. There are six kārakas given in all grammar treatises अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मन् and कर्तृ to express which the case affixes or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थी, सप्तमी, तृतीया, द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively used which, hence, are called Kārakavibhaktis as contrasted with Upapadavibhaktis, which show a relation between two substantives and hence are looked upon as weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis; confer, compare उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari.94. The topic explaining Kārakavibhaktis is looked upon as a very important and difficult chapter in treatises of grammar and there are several small compendiums written by scholars dealing with kārakas only. For the topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to 55, Kat, II. 4.8-42, Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pp.262-264 published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
kālanotion of time created by different contacts made by a thing with other things one after another. Time required for the utterance of a short vowel is taken as a unit of time which is called मात्रा or कालमात्रा, literally measurement of time; (2) degree of a vowel, the vowels being looked upon as possessed of three degrees ह्रस्व,दीर्घ,& प्लुत measured respectively by one, two and three mātrās; confer, compare ऊकालोSझ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P.I.2.27; (3) time notion in general, expressed in connection with an activity in three ways past (भूत), present (वर्तमान), and future (भविष्यत्) to show which the terms भूता, वर्तमाना and भविष्यन्ती were used by ancient grammarians; cf the words पूर्वकाल, उत्तरकाल; also confer, compare पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम् Kāś. on P. II. 4.21 ; (4) place of recital ( पाठदेश ) depending on the time of recital, confer, compare न परकालः पूर्वकाले पुनः (V.Pr.III. 3) a dictum similar to Pāṇini's पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1.
īśeḥ(VII.2.77)अनुकर्षणार्थो विज्ञायते Kāś. on P.IV.2.78; (3) succession of the same consonant brought about; doubling; reduplication; क्रम is used in this way in the Ṛk Prātiśākhya as a synonym of dvitva prescribed by Pāṇini; e. g. अा त्वा रथं becomes अा त्त्वा रथम् ; सोमानं स्वरणम् becomes सोमानं स्स्वरणम् ; confer, compare स्वरानुस्वारोपहितो द्विरुच्यते संयोगादि: स क्रमोSविक्रमे सन् । etc, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. l to 4; confer, compare also स एष द्विर्भावरूपो विधिः क्रमसंज्ञो वेदितव्यः Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1. The root क्रम् IA. is several times used in the Prātiśākhya works for द्विर्भवन, confer, compare also T. Pr.XXI.5; XXIV.5; (4) repetition of a word in the recital of Vedic passages, the recital by such a repetition being called क्रमपाठ, which is learnt and taught with a view to understanding the original forms of words combined in the Saṁhitā by euphonic rules, substitution of letters such as that of ण् for न् , or of ष् for स् , as also the separate words of a compound word ( सामासिकशब्द ); e. g. पर्जन्याय प्र । प्र गायत । गायत दिवः । दिवस्पुत्राय । पुत्राय मीळ्हुषे । मीळ्हुषे इति मीळ्हुषे । confer, compare क्रमो द्वाभ्यामतिक्रम्य् प्रत्यादायोत्तरं तयोः उत्तेरेणोपसंदध्यात् तथार्द्धर्चं समापयेत् ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X. 1. For details and special features, confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) ch. X and XI: confer, compare also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 182190: T. Pr, XXIII. 20, XXIV. 6.
kramapāṭharecital of the Vedic Saṁhitā by means of separate groups of two words, repeating each word except the first of the Vedic verseline; see क्रम a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The various rules and exceptions are given in detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha is supposed to be the original one and the Padapāṭha prepared later on, with a view to preserving the Vedic text without any change or modification of a letter, or accent; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII. 2.16, where Patañjali clearly says that grammar-rules are not to follow the Padapāṭha, but, the writer of the Padapāṭha is to follow the rules already laid down. The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha and the other recitals are later developments of the Padapāṭha as they are not mentioned in the Prātiśākhya works.
khilapāṭhaa supplementary recital or enunciation which is taken along with the original enunciation or upadeśa generally in the form of the sūtras. The word is used in the Kāśikā in the sense of one of the texts forming a part of the original text which is called upadeśa; confer, compare Kāśikā उपदिश्यते अनेनेत्युपदेश: शास्त्रवाक्यानि सूत्रपाठ: खिलपाठश्च (on P.I.3.2); confer, compare also खिलपाठो धातुपाठः प्रातिपदिकपाठो वाक्यपाठश्च Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on Kāśikā I.3.2.
gaṅgādhara[GANGADHARA SHASTRI TELANG] (l)a stalwart grammarian and Sanskrit scholar of repute who was a pupil of Bālasarasvatī of Vārāṇaśī and prepared in the last century a host of Sanskrit scholars in Banaras among whom a special mention could be made of Dr. Thebaut, Dr. Venis and Dr. Gaṅgānātha Jhā. He was given by Government of India the titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C. I.E. His surname was Mānavallī but he was often known as गङाधरशास्त्री तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāṣya, D.E. Society Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34; (2)an old scholar of Vyākarana who is believed to have written a commentary on Vikṛtavallī of Vyādi; (3) a comparatively modern scholar who is said to have written a commentary named Induprakāśa on the Śabdenduśekhara; (4) author of the Vyākaraṇadīpaprabhā, a short commentary on the Vyākaraṇa work of Cidrūpāśramin. See चिद्रूपाश्रमिन्.
ghanaa variety of the क्रमपाठ or recital of the Vedic hymns to show the serial order of words there; one of the eight vikrtis of the padapātha.
ghitaffixes having the mute letter घ्, as for instance, घञ् घ, घच् et cetera, and otherswhich cause the substitution of a guttural in the place of the palatal letter च् or ज् before it: exempli gratia, for example त्याग: राग: confer, compare P.VII.3.52.
cfirst consonant of palatal class of consonants, possessed of the properties, श्वास, अघोष, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठविवृतत्व. च् at the beginning of an affix is mute e. g. च्फञ्, confer, compare चुट् P. I. 3.7; words, having the mute letter च् (dropped), have their last vowel accented acute e. g. भङ्गुरम् । भासुरम् । confer, compare चित: VI. 1.163.
ca(l)the letter च्, the vowel अ being added for facility of utterance, cf Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 21; (2) a Bratyahara or short term standing for the palatal class of consonants च्, छ्, ज्,झ् and ञ्; cf इचशेयास्तालौ Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 66; (3) indeclinable च called Nipata by Panini; confer, compare चादयोSसत्त्वे P. I. 4.57, च possesses four senses समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on II. 2.29. See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2.29 Vart. 15 for a detailed explanation of the four senses. The indeclinable च is sometimes used in the sense of 'a determined mention' or avadharana; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on II. 1.48 and 72. It is also used for the purpose of अनुवृत्ति or अनुकर्षण i. e. drawing a word from the previous rule to the next rule; (confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 1.90) with a convention that a word drawn thus, does not proceed to the next rule; confer, compare चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र Par. Sek Pari. 78; (4) a conventional term for अभ्यास (reduplicative syllable) used in the Jainendra Vyakarana; confer, compare चविकारेषु अपवादा उत्सर्गान्न बाधन्ते Kat. Pari. 75.
carcā(1)splitting up of a word into its component parts, which is generalty shown in the Padaptha by अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means पदपाठ or recital by showing separately the constitutent words of the Samhita or the running text of the Veda. The word is used almost in the same sense in the Mahabhasya in respect of showing the words of a sutra separately; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a repeated word; confer, compare इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत् पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.20; (3) a discussion or a debate where consideration is given to each single word; confer, compare प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 115.
cavargathe group of consonants of the palatal class,.wiz.च् , छ् , ज् , झ् , and ञ्. The word च is used in the same sense in the Pratisakhya works.See the word च.
cuthe group of palatal consonants viz. च्,छ्,ज्,झ् and ञ्; cf चुट् P. I. 3. 7, चोः कुः VIII. 2. 30, कुहोश्चु: VII. 4 62.
chthe second consonant of the palatal class of consonants ( चवर्ग ), which is possessed of the properties श्वास, अघोष, मह्याप्राण and कण्ठविवृतकारित्व. छ् , placed at the beginning of affixes, is mute; while ईय् is substituted for छ् standing at the beginning of taddhita affixes; confer, compare P. I. 3.7 and VII. 1.2. छ् at the end of roots has got ष्, substituted for it: confer, compare P. VIII. 2.36.
jthird consonant of the palatal class of consonants, possessed of the properties नाद, घोष, अल्पप्राण and कण्ठसंवृत्तकारित्व. ज् at the beginning of affixes is mute in Panini's grammar.
jaṭāa kind of Vedic recital wherein each word is repeated six times. जटा is called one of the 8 kinds ( अष्टविकृति) of the Kramapatha, which in its turn is based on the Padapatha; confer, compare जटा माला शिखा रेखा ध्वजो दण्डो रथो घनः। अष्टौ बिकृतय: प्रोक्ताः क्रमपूर्वा मनीषिभिः । जटा is defined as अनुलोमविलोमाभ्यां त्रिवारं हि पठेत् क्रमम् । विलोमे पदवत्संधिः अनुलोमे यथाक्रमम् । The recital of ओषधयः संवदन्ते संवदन्ते सोमेन can be illustrated as ओषधयः सं, समोषधयः, ओषधयः सं, सं वदन्ते, वदन्ते सं, सेवदन्ते, वदन्ते सोमेन,सोमेन वदन्ते , वदन्ते सोमेन ।
jātigenus; class;universal;the notion of generality which is present in the several individual objects of the same kindeclinable The biggest or widest notion of the universal or genus is सत्ता which, according to the grammarians, exists in every object or substance, and hence, it is the denotation or denoted sense of every substantive or Pratipadika, although on many an occasion vyakti or an individual object is required for daily affairs and is actually referred to in ordinary talks. In the Mahabhasya a learned discussion is held regarding whether जाति is the denotation or व्यक्ति is the denotation. The word जाति is defined in the Mahabhasya as follows:आकृतिग्रहणा जातिर्लिङ्गानां च न सर्वभाक् । सकृदाख्यातनिर्गाह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह ॥ अपर आह । ग्रादुभीवविनाशाभ्यां सत्त्वस्य युगपद्गुणैः । असर्वलिङ्गां बह्वर्थो तां जातिं कवयो विदुः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV. 1.63. For details see Bhartphari's Vakyapadiya.
jhfourth consonant of the palatal class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, and महाप्राणत्व; झ् at the beginning of an affix in Panini Sutras is mute; e. g. the affixes झि, झ et cetera, and others; cf चुटूं P. I. 3.7.
ñ(1)the nasal (fifth consonant) of the palatal class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, कण्टसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्य; (2) mute letter, characterized by which an affix signifies वृद्धि for the preceding vowel; ञ् of a taddhita affix, however, signifies वृद्धि for the first vowel of the word to which the affix is added; (3) a mute letter added to a root at the end to signify that the root takes verb-endings of both the padas.
tthe first consonant of the dental class of consonants which has got the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When used as a mute letter by Panini, त् signifies the Svarita accent of the vowel of that affix or so, which is marked with it: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्, पयस्यम् confer, compare P. VI.1.185. When appied to a vowel at its end, त् signifies the vowel of that grade only, possessed by such of its varieties which require the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त् , e. g. अात् stands for अा with any of the three accents as also pure or nasalised; अात् does not include अं or अ 3 confer, compare तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70. The use of the indicatory mute त् for the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. purpose is seen also in the Pratis akhya works; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 114 Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 234.
tavargathe class of dental consonants viz. त्, थ्, द्, ध् and न; confer, compare विभक्तौ तवर्गप्रतिषेधोऽतद्धिते P.I 3,4 Vart. 1.
tasi(1)taddhita affix.affix तस् showing direction by means of a thing exempli gratia, for example वृक्षमूलतः, हिमवत्तः; confer, compare Kas on P.IV.3.114,115; (2) taddhita affix.affix तस् applied in the sense of the ablative case. case and substituted for the ablative case. case affix: exempli gratia, for example ग्रामतः अागच्छति, चोरतो विभेति; sometimes the affix is applied instead of the instrumental or the genitive case also. e. g. वृत्ततः न व्यथते for वृत्तेन न व्यथते; देवा अर्जुनतः अभवन्, for अर्जुनस्य पक्षे अभवन् confer, compare Kas, on P.V.4.44-49.
tānaone uniform accent or tone एकश्रुति, as observed at the time of sacrifices in the case of the recital of the hymns; confer, compare तानलक्षणमेकं स्वरमाहुर्यज्ञकर्मणि Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I.130; confer, compare also P.I. 2.34.
tāra(1)elevated, high; a place for the production of words; confer, compare T.Pr. XVII. 11; (2) recital in a high tone which is recommended in the evening time; confer, compare तारं तु विद्यात्सवने तृतीये, शिरोगतं तत्र सदा प्रयोज्यम् commentary on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 12.
tālavyaliterally produced from तालु the part below the tongue; the vowel इ, चवर्ग, य and श् are called तालव्य, palatal letters; confer, compare इचशेयास्तालौ V.Pr. I. 66. These letters are formed upon the palate by the middle part of the tongue; confer, compare R.Pr. 1.42, R.Pr. II.36.
tu(1)short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the dental consonants त्, थ्, द्, ध् and न् confer, compare P. I. 1.69; (2) personal-ending substituted for ति in the 2nd person. imper. singular. Parasmaipada confer, compare P. III, 4.86; (3) taddhita affix. affix तु in the sense of possession added in Vedic Literature to कम् and शम् e. g. क्रन्तुः, शन्तु: confer, compare P. V. 2.138; (4) unadi affix तु ( तुन्) prescribed by the rule सितनिगमिमसिसच्यविधाञ्कुशिभ्यस्तुन् ( Unadi Sitra I.69 ) before which the augment इ is not added exempli gratia, for example सेतुः सक्तुः et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 2.9
tṛtīyāthe third case; affixes of the third case ( instrumental case or तृतीयाविभक्ति ) which are placed (1) after nouns in the sense of an instrument or an agent provided the agent is not expressed by the personal-ending of the root; e. g. देवदत्तेन कृतम्, परशुना छिनत्ति: confer, compare P. III. 3.18; (2) after nouns connected with सह्, nouns meaning defective limbs, nouns forming the object of ज्ञा with सम् as also nouns meaning हेतु or a thing capable of produc ing a result: e. g. पुत्रेण सहागतः, अक्ष्णा काणः, मात्रा संजानीते, विद्यया यशः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II.3.19,23; (3) optionally with the ablative after nouns meaning quality, and optionally with the genitive after pronouns in the sense of हेतु, when the word हेतु is actually used e. g. पाण्डित्येन मुक्तः or पाण्डित्यान्मुक्त:; केन हेतुना or कस्य हेतोर्वसति; it is observed by the Varttikakara that when the word हेतु or its synonym is used in a sentence, a pronoun is put in any case in apposition to that word id est, that is हेतु or its synonym e.g, केन निमित्तेन, किं निमित्तम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 3. 25, 27; (4) optionally after nouns connected with the words पृथक्, विना, नाना, after the words स्तोक, अल्प, as also after दूर, अन्तिक and their synonyms; exempli gratia, for example पृथग्देवदत्तेन et cetera, and others स्तोकेन मुक्तः, दूरेण ग्रामस्य, केशैः प्रसितः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.3.32, 33, 35, 44; (5) optionally with the locative case after nouns meaning constellation when the taddhita affix. affix after them has been elided; exempli gratia, for example पुष्येण संप्रयातोस्मि श्रवणे पुनरागतः Mahabharata; confer, compare P.II.3.45; (6) optionally with the genitive case after words connected with तुल्य or its synonyms; exempli gratia, for exampleतुल्यो देवदत्तेन, तुल्यो देवदत्तस्य; confer, compare P. II.3.72.
taittirīyaprātiśākhyacalled also कृष्णयजुःप्रातिशाख्य and hence representing possibly all the different branches or Sakhas of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is not attributed definitely to a particular author but is supposed to have been revised from time to time and taught by various acaryas who were the followers of the Taittiriya Sakha.The work is divided into two main parts, each of which is further divided into twelve sections called adhyayas, and discusses the various topics such as letters and their properties, accents, euphonic changes and the like, just as the other Pratisakhya works. It is believed that Vararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya wrote Bhasyas on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, but at present, only two important commentary works on it are available(a) the 'Tribhasyaratna', based upon the three Bhasyas mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. as the title shows, written by Somayarya and (b) the 'Vaidikabharana' written by Gopalayajvan. For details see Introduction to 'Taittiriya Pratisakhya' edition Govt Oriental Library Series, Mysore.
tresvarya(1)use of the three accents acute, grave and circumflex at the time of the recital of the Veda; त्रयः स्वरा एव त्रैस्वर्यम्; confer, compare चातुर्वर्ण्यादीनां स्वार्थॆ उपसंख्यानम् । त्रैलोक्यम् , त्रैस्यर्यम् Kas, on P. V. 1. 124. confer, compare also यद्येवं त्रैस्वर्ये न प्रकल्पते तत्र को दोषः। त्रैस्वर्येणाधीमहॆ इत्येतन्नोपपद्यते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.31.
tvantaddhita affix. affix त्व before which there is observed the caesura or avagraha in the recital of the Padapatha. e: g. देवत्वमिति देवsत्वम् । confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 9.
th()second consonant of the dental class of consonants possessed of the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and महाप्राणत्व; (2) augment थ् ( थुक् ) added to the words षष् , कति, कतिपय and चतुर् before the Purana affix डट्. e. g. षण्णां पूरण: षष्ठ:, कतिथः, चतुर्थः; confer, compare Kas, on P. V. 2.51 ; (3) substitute for the consonant ह् of आह् before any consonant except a nasal, and a semivowel as also for the consonant स् of स्था preceded by the preposition उद्: confer, compare P, VIII. 2.35, VIII. 4.61.
dthird consonant of the dental class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणता;(2) consonant द् substituted for the final letter of nouns ending with the affix वस् as also for the final letter of स्रंस्, ध्वंस् and अनडुह् provided the final letter is at the end of a pada; exempli gratia, for example विद्वद्भयाम् et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, VIII. 2.72; (3) consonant द् substituted for the final स् of roots excepting the root.अस्, before the personal ending तिप् of the third person. singular.; e. g. अचकाद् भवान् ; confer, compare P. VIII. 3.93.
dantaplace where the utterance of dental letters originates;confer, compare ऌतुलसानां दन्ताः S. K. on P. I. 1.9.
dntyaproduced at the teeth, dental; formed at the teeth by the tip of the tongue; exempli gratia, for example the letters लृ ल् ,स् and तवर्ग; confer, compare लृलसिता दन्ते V.Pr.I.69. According to Panini's grammar लॄ(long) does not exist. According to Taittirya Prtisakhya र् is partly dental and partly lingual; cf T.Pr.II.41, while व् is partly dental and partly labial; confer, compare T.Pr. II.43; confer, compare दन्त्या जिह्वाग्रकरणाः V. Pr.I. 76; confer, compare लुग्वा दुहदिहलिहगुहामात्मनेपदे दन्त्ये P. VII. 3.73.
dṛṣṭaseen in use in Vedic Literature, or Classical Literature, or in the talk of cultured people; said in connection with words which a grammarian tries to explain; confer, compare दृष्टानुविधिश्छन्दसि भवति' Vyadi Pari. Patha 68.
drutaliterally rapid; the vice of rapidity in utterance;a fault of speech especially in connection with the utterance of vowels in Vedic recital when on account of haste the utterance of letters becomes indistinct. confer, compare संदृष्टमेणीकृतमर्धकं द्रुतं विकीर्णमेताः स्वरद्रोषभावनाः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1 vart. 18.
gh(1)fourth letter of the dental class(तवर्ग) possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, कण्ठसंवृतत्व and महाप्रण ; (2) substitute ध् , for the ह् of नह् before a ' jhal ' consonant or at the end of a word e. g. नद्धम्, उपानत्, confer, compare P. VIII. 2. 34; (3) substitute ध् for the letters त् and थ् placed after a fourth letter, e. g लब्धुम्, दोग्धा et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VIII. 2. 40.
dhātua root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
dhātūpadeśaenumeration or recital of roots in the Dhatupatha;confer, compare प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयश्वोपदिष्टः। क्व । धातूपदेशे प्रातिपदिकोपदेशे च । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 1 1.
dhāraṇa(1)suppression of a consonant, out of two successive consonants which is looked upon as a fault of recital; exempli gratia, for example ह्वयामि when recited as वयामि; efeminine. धारणमनुपलब्धिः Uvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 6; (2) repetition of a consonant which is also a fault; exempli gratia, for example ज्ज्योतिष्कृत् for ज्योतिष्कृत्: confer, compare Uvvata on XIV.6;confer, compare also धारयन्त; परक्रमं et cetera, and others explained by Uvvata as सान्तस्थस्य संयोगस्य आदौ रक्तं धारयन्तो विलम्बमानाः परक्रमं कुर्वन्ति where धारयन्तः means 'lengthening’ or 'prolonging' confer, compare R.Pr. on XIV.23; (3) the peculiar position of the mouth (मुखसंधारणम् ) by which a double consonant is recited as a single one, confer, compare द्विवर्णमेकवर्णवत् ( एकप्रयत्ननिर्वर्त्य ) धारणात् exempli gratia, for example व्यात्तम् , कुक्कुटः, confer, compare V.Pr. IV.144.
dhvānathe second out of the seven Positions of voice in the Veda recital which are-उपांशु, ध्वान, निमद, उपब्दिमत्, मन्द्र, मध्यम and तार.
dhvePersonal-ending of the second. person. Pl. Atmanepada in the present and perfect tenses. न् fifth consonant of the dental class of consonants which is possessed of the properties घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अानुनासिक्य. In Panini's grammar the nasal consonant न् (a)is added as an augment prescribed\ \नुट् or नुम् which originally is seen as न्, but afterwards changed into अनुस्वार or परसवर्ण as required, as for example in पयांसि, यशांसि, निन्दति, वन्दति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII. 1.58-73, VII. 1.7983; VIII. 3.24; (b) is changed into ण् when it directly follows upon ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् or even intervened by a vowel, a semivowel except ल् , a guttural consonant, a labial consonant or an anusvara; confer, compare P. VIII. 4.1.1-31. (c) is substituted for the final म् of a root, e. g. प्रशान्, प्रतान् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.64, 65.
nāgeśathe most reputed modern scholar of Panini's grammar, who was well-versed in other Sastras also, who lived in Benares in the latter half of the seventeenth and the first half of the eighteenth century. He wrote many masterly commentaries known by the words शेखर and उद्द्योत on the authoritative old works in the different Sastras, the total list of his small and big works together well nigh exceeding a hundredition He was a bright pupil of Hari Diksita, the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita. He was a renowned teacher also, and many of the famous scholars of grammar in Benares and outside at present are his spiritual descendants. He was a Maharastriya Brahmana of Tasgaon in Satara District, who received his education in Benares. For some years he stayed under the patronage of Rama, the king of Sringibera at his time. He was very clever in leading debates in the various Sastras and won the title of Sabhapati. Out of his numerous works, the Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa, the Laghusabdendusekhara on the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the Paribhasendusekhara are quite wellknown and studied by every one who wishes to get proficiency in Panini's grammar. For details see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol. VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D. E. Society, Poona.
naipātikaaccessory; accidental; निपातात् अागतानि.
paṭhanaoral recital, the word is used in connection with the use of words by the author himself in his text which he is supposed to have handed over orally to his disciples, as was the case with the ancient Vedic and Sūtra works; confer, compare the words पठित, पठिष्यते, पठ्यते and the like, frequently used in the Mahābhāșya in connection with the mention of words in the Sūtras of Pāņini.
padapāṭhathe recital of the Veda text pronouncing or showing each word separately as detached from the adjoining word. It is believed that the Veda texts were recited originally as running texts by the inspired sages, and as such, they were preserved by people by oral tradition. Later on after several centuries, their individually distinct words were shown by grammarians who were called Padakāras. The पदपाठ later on had many modifications or artificial recitations such as क्रम, जटा, घन et cetera, and others in which each word was repeated twice or more times, being uttered connectedly with the preceding or the following word, or with both. These artificial recitations were of eight kinds, which came to be known by the term अष्टविकृतयः.
parigrahaalso परिग्रहण. (1) acceptance, inclusion; confer, compare किं प्रयोजनम् | प्रत्ययार्थे परिग्रहार्थम् M.Bh. on P.III.26.1 ; (2) repetition of a Samhita word in the Pada recital, technically named वेष्टक also; repetition of a word with इति interposed; e. g. सुप्राव्या इति सुप्रऽ अव्या: Rg Veda II.13.9, अलला भवन्तीरित्यललाSभवन्तीः Rg. IV.18.6; confer, compare परिग्रहेत्वनार्षान्तात् तेन वैकाक्षरीक्तात् | परेषां न्यास-माचारं व्यालिस्तौ चेत्स्वरौ परौ; Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 14. confer, compare also, R.Pr.XI.32,36,42.
paribhāṣāan authoritative statement or dictum, helping (1) the correct interpretation of the rules (sūtras) of grammar, or (2) the removal of conflict between two rules which occur simultaneously in the process of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि), or (3) the formation of correct words. Various definitions of the word परिभाषा are given by commentators, the prominent ones beingपरितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or, परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The word is also defined as विधौ नियामकरिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can also be briefiy defined as the convention of a standard author. Purusottamadeva applies the word परिभाषा to the maxims of standard writers, confer, compare परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while Haribhaskara at the end of his treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that Vyaadi was the first writer on Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by Panini. For the difference between परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya on II.1.1. Many times the writers of Sutras lay down certain conventions for the proper interpretation of their rules, to which additions are made in course of time according to necessities that arise, by commentators. In the different systems of grammar there are different collections of Paribhasas. In Panini's system, apart from commentaries thereon, there are independent collections of Paribhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva, Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nilakantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and a few others. There are independent collections of Paribhasas in the Katantra, Candra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and Hemacandra systems of grammar. It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas are common, with their wordings quite similar or sometimes identical in the different systemanuscript. Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians, which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is commented upon by more than twenty five scholars during the last two or three centuries. The total number of Paribhasas in the diferent systems of grammar may wellnigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.
paribhāṣāsegraha'a work containing a collection of independent works on Paribhasas in the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar. The collectlon consists of the following works (i) परिभाषासूचन containing 93 Paribhasas with a commentary by Vyadi, an ancient grammarian who lived before Patanjali; ( ii ) ब्याडीयपरिभाषापाठ, a bare text of 140 Paribhaasaas belonging to the school of Vyadi (iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 98 Paribhasa aphorisms, attributed to the ancient grammarian Saka-tayana, or belonging to that school; [iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 86 Paribhasa aphorisms given at the end of his grammar work by Candragomin; (v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on 65 Paribhas aphorisms of the Katantra school by Durgasimha; (vi) कातन्त्रपारभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a short gloss on 62 Paribhasa aphorisms of the Katantra school by Bhavamisra; (vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Katantra school without any author's name associated with it; (viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Kalapa school without any author's name associated with it; (ix) जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss written by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the compiler of the collection), on 108 Paribhasas or maxims noticeable in the Mahavrtti of Abhayanandin on the Jainendra Vyakarana of Pujyapada Devanandin; (x) भोजदेवकृतपरि-भाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules given by Bhoja in the second pada of the first adhyaaya of his grammar work named Sarasvatikanthabharana; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a bare text of 140 paribhasas(which are called by the name nyaya) given by Hema-hamsagani in his paribhasa.work named न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लधुपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss on 120 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Puruso-ttamadeva; (xiii) वृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-taining 130 Paribhasas with a commentary by Siradeva and a very short,gloss on the commentary by Srimanasarman ( xiv ) परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Nilakantha; (xv) परिभाषाभास्कर a collection of 132 Paribhasas with a commentary by Haribhaskara Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Paribhasa given and explained by Nagesabhatta in his Paribhasendusekhara. The total number of Paribhasas mentioned and treated in the whole collection exceeds five hundredition
parivartanareversion in the order of words as found in the recital of the Veda at the time of the recital of जटा, घन and other artificial types of recitations.
pāṭha(1)recital of a sacred Vedic or Sastra work; the original recital of an authoritative text;(2) the various artificial ways or methods of such a recital; c.g. पदपाठ, क्रमपाठ et cetera, and others in the case of Vedic Literature: (3) an original recital such as the सुत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ, वार्तिकपाठ and परिभाषापाठ in the case of the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar; the five Paathas are called पञ्चपाठी; (4) recitation; confer, compare नान्तरेण पाठं स्वरा अनुबन्धा वा शक्या विज्ञातुम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.3.1 Vaart. 13; (5) reading, variant: confer, compare चूर्णादीनि अप्राण्युपग्रहादिति सूत्रस्य पाठान्तरम् Kaas. on P.V.2.134.
pāṇinithe illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.
pāṇinisūtracalled also by the name अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to the SUtras of Paanini comprising eight adhyaayaas or books. The total number of SUtras as commented upon by the writers of the Kasika and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983. As nine sUtras out of these are described as Vaarttikas and two as Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is evident that there were 3972 SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini according to Patanjali. A verse current among Vaiyakarana schools states the number to be 3996; confer, compare त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान् स्वयम् । The traditional recital by Veda Scholars who look upon the Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists of 3983 Sutras which are accepted and commented upon by all later grammarians and commentators. The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly aim at the correct formation of words, discuss declension, conjugation, euphonic changes, verbal derivatives, noun derivatives and accents. For details see Vol.VII, Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition pp. 152-162.
pāṇinisūtravārtikaname given to the collection of explanatory pithy notes of the type of SUtras written. mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Varttikas are generally written in the style of the SUtras, but sometimes they are written in Verse also. The total number of Varttikas is well-nigh a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. 5000, including Varttikas in Verse.There are three kinds of Varttikas; confer, compareउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have divided Varttikas into two classes as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this definition be followed, many of the Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya as explaining and commenting upon the Sutras will not strictly be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their total number which is given as exceeding 5000, will be reduced to about 1400 or so. There are some manuscript copies which give this reduced number, and it may be said that only these Vārttikas were written by Kātyāyana while the others were added by learned grammarians after Kātyāyana. In the Mahābhāșya there are seen more than 5000 statements of the type of Vārttikas out of which Dr. Kielhorn has marked about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some places the Mahābhāșyakāra has quoted the names of the authors of some Vārttikas or their schools, in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. et cetera, and others Many of the Vārttikas given in the Mahābhāșya are not seen in the Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which, evidently are composed by scholars who flourished after Patańjali, as they have not been noticed by the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very difficult to show separately the statements of the Bhāșyakāra popularly named 'ișțis' from the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana and others. For details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya, D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.
pāraṇathe same as पारायण, recital of the Veda in any of the various artificial ways prescribed, such as krama, jatā, ghana et cetera, and others, cf ऋते न च द्वैपदसंहृितास्वरौ प्रसिध्यतः पारणकर्म चोत्तमम् R.Pr.XI.37.
pārāyaṇaoral recital of a sacred work. See पारण.
pitmarked with the mute letter प् which is indicative of a grave accent in the case of affixes marked with it, as for example, the affixes तिप् , सिप् and मिप् ; confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III. 1.4. A Sarvadhātuka affix, marked with the mute consonant प्, in Pāņiņi's Grammar has been described as instrumental in causing many operations such as (a) the substitution of guņa; (cf P. VII. 3 84,9l). (b) the prevention of guņa in the case of a reduplicative syllable as also in the case of the roots भू and सू ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.87, 88 ); (c) the substitution of Vŗddhi, (confer, compare P. VII. 3.89, 90 ), (d) the augments इ and ई in the case of the roots तृह् and ब्रू respectively ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.92, 93, 94 ), and (e) acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix in the case of the roots भी, हृी, भृ and others ( confer, compare P. VI. 1.192 ). A short vowel (of a root) gets त् added to it when followed by a kŗt affix marked with प्: exempli gratia, for example, विजित्य​, प्रकृत्य, et cetera, and others:(confer, compare P. VI. 1.71 ).
punaruktaa passage which is repeated in the क्रमपाठ and the other Pāțhas or recitals; the word is also used in the sense of the conventional repetition of a word at the end of a chapter. The word पुनर्वचन is used also in the same sense; confer, compare यथोक्तं पुनरुक्तं त्रिपदप्रभृति त्रिपदप्रभृति । T.Pr.I.6l: confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X.8 and 10.
punargrahaṇarecital of a word again in the Krama and other Pāțhas for a special purpose, although such a recital after three times is generally discouraged; confer, compare एवमर्थविशेषात् पुनरुक्तस्य ग्रहणं भवति ... Uv Bhāşya on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 177.
prakrama(l)the place of articulation, the place of the production of sound, such as throat, chest, palate and the like; confer, compare प्रक्रम्यन्ते अस्मिन्वर्णा इति प्रक्रमः स्थानमुच्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Pradipa on सिद्धं तु समानप्रक्रमवचनात् P.I.2.30 Vart.2; (2) recital of Veda, described as क्रमपाठ confer, compare उभयथा च प्रक्रमे दोषो भवति M.Bh.on P. VIII. 4.28 confer, compare also "अष्टसु प्रक्रमेषु दोषो भवति"quoted in the Mahabhasya on P.VI. 1.172; (3) regularity in the position of words, regular order of words.
pragītaa fault of utterance or recital where a simple word in conversation or recital is uttered in a tone proper for singing or in a manner suitable for singing; cf प्रगीत: सामवदुच्चारितः Kaiy. on M.Bh.Ahni.1.
pratikrama(1)recital in the reverse order as in some of the artificial recitations of the Samhita text such as जटा, घन et cetera, and others
pratipadapāṭha(1)recital ofeach and every word; (2) enumeration of every word; confer, compare किं शब्दानां प्रतिपत्तौ प्रतिपदपाठः कर्तव्यः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahn. 1.
pravacana(1)recital of Vedic texts; confer, compare अथैके प्राहुरनुसंहितं तत् पारायणे प्रवचनं प्रशस्तम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV. 16; cf also इति प्र बाभ्रव्य उवाच च क्रमं क्रमप्रवक्ता ( बाभ्रव्यः ) प्रथमं शशंस च , Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI 33; (2) the reading of the Samhita text प्रावचनो वा यजुषि । प्रवचने भवः स्वरः प्रावचनः ; प्रवचनशब्देनार्षपाठ उच्यते 1 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 132.
prākbefore a particular thing in place, or in recital, or in mention. The word is used generally to show the limit upto which a particular topic extends; confer, compare तसिलादयः प्राक् पाशपः; cf also प्राक् कडारात्समासः P. I. 4.l : confer, compare also अथ आख्याः समाम्नायाधिकाः प्राग्रिफितात् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 33.
prāgdeśadistricts of the east especially districts to the east of Ayodhya and Pataliputra, such as Magadha, Vanga and others; nothing can definitely be said as to which districts were called Eastern by Panini and his followers Katyayana and Patanjali. A Varttika given in the Kasika but not traceable in the Mahabhasya defines Pragdesa as districts situated to the east of शरावती (probably the modern river Ravi or a river near that river ): confer, compare प्रागुदञ्चौ विभजते हंसः क्षीरोदके यथा । विदुषां शब्दसिद्ध्यर्थे सा नः पातु शरावती ॥ Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on एङ् प्राचां देशे P. I. 1.75. There is a reading सरस्वती in some manuscript copies and सरस्वती is a wellknown river in the Punjab near Kuruksetra, which disappears in the sandy desert to the south: a reading इरावती is also found and इरावती may stand for the river Ravi. शरावती in Burma is simply out of consideration. For details see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. pp. 202-204 and 141-142 D. E. Society's Edition.
prāṇaair, which is instrumental in producing sound; confer, compare वायुः प्राणः कण्ठ्यमनुप्र दानम् R.Pr.XIII.1.
prātiśākhyaa work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.
prāmāṇikaauthoritative; those that talk with authority; confer, compare प्रामाणिकमतमेतत्, a phrase often used by commentators.
prauḍhamanoramākhaṇḍana(1)a grammatical work written by a grammarian named Cakrapani of the Sesa family of grammarians. The work is meant to refute the arguments of Bhattoji Diksita in his Praudhamanorama; (2) a grammar work written by the famous poet and rhetorician Jagannātha in refutation of the doctrines and explanations given in the Praudhamanorama by the stalwart Grammarian Bhattoji Diksita. The work is not a scholarly one and it has got a tone of banter. It was written by Jagannatha to show that he could also write works on Grammar and the bearded pedant Bhattoji should not be proud of his profound scholarship in Grammar. The work of Jagannatha was named मनोरमाकुचमर्दन possibly by his followers or even by himselfeminine.
buddhinotion, mental understanding; mental inclination; confer, compare बुद्धि: संप्रत्यय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् | Or अस्तेर्भूर्भवतीत्यस्तिबुद्ध्यां भवतिबुद्धिं प्रतिपद्यते M. Bh on P. I.1.56 Vart. 14; (2) mental inclusion; confer, compare यां यां विभक्तिं आश्रयितुं बुद्धिरुपजायते सा साश्रयितव्या M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 57: confer, compare अथ बुद्धिः अविशेषात्स्मपुरा हेतू, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2.118 Vart. 4.
belavalakara[ SHRIPAD KRISHNA BELVALKAR ]a well-known Sanskrit scholar of the present day who has been the General Editor of the Mahabharata published by the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona. He has written a book on grammar reviewing very briefly the various systems of Sanskrit grammar, which is named "Systems of Sanskrit Grammar".
bhaṭṭojīsurnamed Diksita; a stalwart grammarian of the Panini system who flourished in the first half of the seventeenth century and wrote many independent books and commentaries such as the Siddhantakaumudi, the Praudhamanorama, the Vaiyakaranasiddhantakarika, the Sabdakaustubha and others. The most reputed work out of these, however, is the Siddhantakaumudi which is very popular even today and which has almost set aside other works of its kind such as the Prakriyakaumudi and others. Bhattoji was a Telagu Brahmana, as generally believed, and although he belonged to the South, he made Varanasi his home where he prepared a school of learned Grammarians. Although he carried on his work silently in Varanasi, he was envied by the reputed rhetorician of his time Pandita Jagannātha, who criticised his work ( Bhattojis work ) named Manorama very severely. See प्रौढमनोरमा a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got many commentaries of which the Tattvabodhini written by Bhattoji's pupil Jnanendrasarasvati is appreciated much by learned grammarians.
bhisaffix of the instrumental plural before which the base is looked upon as a Pada and sometimes split up in the Padapāṭha, especially when the preceding word has got no change for its last letter or syllable.
bhairavamiśraone of the reputed grammarians of the latter half of the eighteenth century and the first half of the nineteenth century who wrote commentaries on several prominent works on grammar. He was the son of भवदेव and his native place was Prayāga. He has written the commentary called Candrakalā on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara, Parikṣā on the Vaiyākaraṇabhũṣanasāra, Gadā called also Bhairavī or Bhairavīgadā on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and commentaries (popularly named Bhairavī) on the Śabdaratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is reported to have visited Poona, the capital of the Peśawas and received magnificent gifts for exceptional proficiency in Nyāya and Vyākaraṇa. For details see pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VII . Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya D. E. Society's Edition.
bhyāmcase-affix of the instrumental, dative and ablative dual; confer, compare स्वौजसमौट् P. IV. 1. 2.
mahābhāṣyapradīpavivaraṇa(1)original name of the learned commentary on the 'Pradipa' of Kaiyata written by Nagesabhatta, a stalwart and epoch-making grammarian of the 18th century. The commentary is known popularly by the name 'Uddyota' or Pradipoddyota; (2) name of the commentary on Kaiyata's Pradipa by Nityaananda Parvatiya. The commentary is also known by the name दीपप्रभा.
y(1)a consonant of the palatal class, called semivowel or अन्तःस्थ( spelt as अन्तस्थ also ), possessed of the properties संवृतत्व, नाद, घोष and अनुनासिकत्व in addition; (2) a substitute for म् when that म् is followed by ह् which is followed by य्. e. g.किंय्ह्य: confer, compare यवलपरे यवला वा. P. VIII.3. 26 Vart.l ; (3) य् looked upon as possessed of a very little effort in production i. e. which appears as almost dropped but not completely dropped when its elision is prescribed at the end of a word. e. gभोय् अच्युत; confer, compare व्योर्लधुप्रयत्नतर: शाकटायनस्य P. VIII. 3.18.
yathāgṛhītaṃas they are actually found in Vedic recital with some irregularties of euphonic changes,lengthening of the vowel and the like. Specimens of such phrases are given in R.Pr.II.33 to 39.
yadṛcchāśabdliterally a chance-word: Samjna-sabda or proper noun which is given accidentally without any found used attention to derivation or authority confer, compare अयं , तर्हि यदृच्छाशब्दोsपरिहार्यः। लृफिङ्: लृफिङ्ङ् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on Siva Stra2.
rathaname of one of the eight kinds of recitals of the Veda Samhita by dividing it into the component words ( पद ) and reciting the component words by repeating them, in their regular order and reverse order too.
l(1)a consonant of the dental class which is a semi-vowel ( यण् ) with liquid contact in the mouth, and which is inaspirate ( अल्पप्राण ),voiced ( घोष ) and both nasalised and unnasalised; (2) name in general ( लकार ) given to the personal endings applied to roots in the ten tenses and moods which take different substitutes ति, त:, अन्ति et cetera, and others and have various modifications and augments in the different tenses and moods; (3) substituted as a semi-vowel ( यण् ) for the vowel ऌ followed by any other vowel in the euphonic combinations; (4)applied at the beginning of nontaddhita affixes as a mute letter indicating the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare लिति; P. VI. 1.193; ( 5 ) substituted for त्, थ्, द्, घ् or न् before ल्, confer, compare P.VIII.4. 60; (6) substituted under certain conditions for the consonant र् (a) of the root कृप्, (b) of prefixes प्र and परा before the root अय्, (c) of the root गॄ in frequentative forms and optionally before affixes beginning with a vowel, and (d ) of the word परि before घ and अङ्क; confer, compare P. VIII. 2. 18 to 22. _ ल (1) consonant ल्; see ल् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.' (2) a general term usually used by ancient grammarians to signifyलोप (elision or disappearance) of a letter or a syllable or a word; confer, compare सर्वसादेर्द्विगोश्च ल: | सवार्तिक:, द्वितन्त्र: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.2.60; (3) taddhita affix. affix ल added to the word क्लिन्न when चिल् and पिल् are substituted for the word क्लिन्न; e.g, चिल्लः, पिल्ल: confer, compare P. V. 2.33 Vārt 2.
laghuśabdenduśekharaname of a commentary on Bhațțojī's Siddhāntakaumudī written by Nāgeśa Bhațța, the stalwart Grammarian of the eighteenth century. The work is named लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर which differentiates it from the author's another work बृहच्छब्देन्दुशेखर of which the former is an abridgment. As the study of the Laghuśabdenduśekhara is very common and as the Bŗhatśabdenduśekhara is seldom studied, it is always the Laghuśabdenduśekhara that is understood by the simple and popular name Śekhara.
v(1)fourth letter of the class of consonants headed by य्, which are looked upon as semi-vowels; व् is a dental, soft, non-aspirate consonant pronounced as ब् in some provinces and written also sometimes like ब्, especially when it stands at the beginning of a word; (2) substitute for उ which is followed by a vowel excepting उ; e. g, मधु+अरि: = मध्वरि:; confer, compare इको यणचि P. VI. I. 77; (3) the consonant व्, which is sometimes uttered with very little effort when it is at the end of a word and followed by a vowel or a semivowel, or a fifth, fourth or third consonant or the consonant ह्. In such cases it is called लघूच्चारण; confer, compare यस्योच्चारणे जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानां शैथिल्यं जायते स लघूच्चारण: S. K. on P.VIII.3. 18;(4) solitary remnant of the affixes क्विप्,क्विन्, ण्वि and the like, when the other letters which are mute are dropped and the affix क्वप् or the like becomes a zero affix. This व् also is finally dropped; confer, compare वेरपृक्तस्य P. VI.1.67.
vārtikapāṭhathe text of the Varttikas as traditionally handed over in the oral recital or in manuscripts As observed a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.(see वार्त्तिक),although a large number of Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya are ascribed to Katyayana, the genuine Varttikapatha giving such Varttikas only, as were definitely composed by him, has not been preserved and Nagesa has actually gone to the length of making a statement like " वार्तिकपाठ: भ्रष्टः" ; confer, compare . Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on P.I.l.I2 Varttika 6.
vikṛtichange, modification as different from the original which is called प्रकृतिः confer, compareप्रकृतिरुपादानकारणं । तस्यैव उत्तरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.I.12. विकृतिवल्ली a work on the modified recital of the Veda words, or पदपाठविकृति, ascribed to Vyadi who is believed to have been a pupil of वर्ष.
vikrama(1)name given to a grave vowel placed between two circumflex vowels, or between a circumflex and an acute, or between an acute and a circumflex; confer, compare स्वरितयोर्मध्ये यत्र नीचं स्यात्, उदात्तयोर्वा अन्यतरतो वा उदात्तस्वरितयोः स विक्रम: T.Pr. XIX.I ; (2) name given to a grave vowel between a pracaya vowel and an acute or a circumflex vowel: confer, compare प्रचयपूर्वश्च कौण्डिन्यस्य T.Pr.XIX.2: (8) repetition of a word or पद as in the Krama recital of the Veda words; (4) name given to a visarjaniya which has remained intact, as for instance in यः प्रणतो निमिषतः ; confer, compare R.Pr. I.5; VI.1 ; the word विक्रम is sometimes used in the sense of visarjaniya in general: cf also अनिङ्गयन् विक्रममेषु कुर्यात् R.Pr. XIII.11.
vigrahaṇaenclosure or closure(वेष्टन)by the use of the word इति as done in the Krama and other Veda-recitals.
vighnakṛtimpediment to an operation caused by something preceding on account of its coming in the way: a vyavaya or vyavadhana or intervention which is not admissible just as the interruption of palatals, linguals, dentals and sibilants excepting हू for the change of न् into ण् : confer, compare अव्यवेतं विग्रहे विघ्नकृद्भिः R.Pr. V.25.
viparīta(1)in the opposite or reverse way: confer, compare विपरीताच्चेति वक्तव्यम् । पारावारीणः M.Bh. on P.IV.2.93 Vart. 2; (2) change of ऋ into इ, seen sometimes in Vedic Literature when that ऋ is preceded or followed by a palatal letter; exempli gratia, for example श्रृङगे into शिङ्गे (Ṛk. Saṁh. V-2.9) बिभृयात् into बिभियात् (Ṛk.Saṁh. x.x.9) विचृत into विचित्त Ṛg. Veda II.27.16; confer, compare अनन्तरे तद्विपरीतमाहुस्तालव्ये श्रृङगे बिभृयाद्विचृत्ताः R.Pr.XIV.17.
vivṛtaname given to an internal effort (as contrasted with the external effort named विवार ) when the tip, middle, or root of the tongue which is instrumental in producing a sound, is kept apart from the place or sthāna of the Pro duction of the sound; confer, compare तत्रोत्पत्तेः प्राग्यदा जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानि तत्तद्वर्णोत्पत्तिस्थानानां ताल्वादीनां दूरतः वर्तन्ते तदा विवृतता Tattvabodhini on S. K. on P.I.1.9.
visarjanīyasame as विसर्ग which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare विसृज्यते पुनर्वर्णैर्न संबध्यते इति विसर्गः; Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on Kat. I. 1. 16. The term विसृष्ट is also used in the same sense. The visarjanīya has the same position (स्थान) in the mouth as the vowel after which it occurs. It is a glottal sound; the Ṛk-Prātiśākhya says that some scholars describe visarjanīya as a chest sound: confer, compare कण्ठयोकार:प्रथमपञ्चमौ च द्वावूष्माणौ केचिदेतावुरस्यौ | Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I 18: confer, compare also उरसि विसर्जनीयो वा Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 3.
vṛtti(1)treatment, practice of pronunciation; (2) conversion of one phonetic element into another; confer, compare R.Pr.I.95;(3) position of the padas or words as they stand in the Saṁhhitā text, the word is often seen used in this way in the compound word पदवृत्ति; आन्पदा: पदवृत्तयः R.Pr. IV.17: (4) modes of recital of the Vedic text which are described to be three द्रुत, मध्य and विलम्बित based upon the time of the interval and the pronunciation which differs in each one; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.4. 109, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4; also I.l.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).ll ; ( 5 ) nature confer, compare गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वम् R.Pr.XVIII.33; (6) interpretation of a word; (7) verbal or nominal form of a root; confer, compare अर्थनित्यः परीक्षेत केनचिद् वृत्तिसामान्येन Nirukta of Yāska.II.1; (8)mode or treatment followed by a scientific treatise; cf का पुनर्वृत्तिः । वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः | M.Bh. in Āhnika l on वृत्तिसमवायार्थ उपदेश: Vārttika 10; (9) manner of interpretation with the literal sense of the constituents present or absent, described usually as two-fold जहत्स्वार्था and अजहत्स्वार्था, | but with a third kind added by some grammarians viz. the जहदजहत्स्वार्था; (10) a compound word giving an aggregate sense different from the exact literal sense of the constituent words; there are mentioned five vṛittis of this kind; confer, compare परार्थाभिधानं वृत्तिः । कृत्तद्धितसमासैकदेशधातुरूपाः पञ्च वृत्तयः | वृत्त्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः S. K. at the end of the Ekaśeṣaprakaraṇa; ( 11 ) interpretation of a collection of statements; the word was originally applied to glosses or comments on the ancient works like the Sūtra works, in which the interpretation of the text was given with examples and counterexamples where necessary: confer, compare वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा नामधातुपारायणादिषु; introductory stanza in the Kāśikā.Later on, when many commentary works were written,the word वृत्ति was diferentiated from भाष्य, वार्तिक, टीका,चूर्णि, निर्युक्ति, टिप्पणी, पञ्जिका and others, and made applicable to commentary works concerned with the explanation of the rules with examples and counter-examples and such statements or arguments as were necessary for the explanation of the rules or the examples and counter examples. In the Vyākaraṇa-Śāstra the word occurs almost exclusively used for the learned Vṛtti on Pāṇini-sūtras by Vāmana and Jayāditya which was given the name Kāśikā Vṛtti; confer, compare तथा च वृत्तिकृत् often occurring in works on Pāṇini's grammar.
veṣṭakalifeminine. enclosure or envelope; the term is used in the sense of परिग्रहं with reference to the repetition of one and the same word more than once in the Krama and other artificial recitals; confer, compare परिग्रहे त्वनाषीन्तात् तेन वैकाक्षरीकृतात् | परॆषां न्यासमाचारं, व्यालिस्तौ चेत् स्वरौ परौ|| on which Uvvata remarks परिग्रहे वेष्टके.
vyavasthitavibhāṣāan option which does not apply universally in all the instances of a rule which prescribes an operation optionally, but applies necessarily in : some cases and does not apply at all in the other cases, the total result being an option regarding the conduct of the rule. The rules अजेर्व्यघञपॊ: P. II. 4.56, लट: शतृशानचावप्रथमासमानाधिकरणे III. 2.124 and वामि I. 4.5 are some of the rules which have got an option described as व्यवस्थितविभाषा. The standard instances of व्यवस्थितविभाषा are given in the ancient verse देवत्रातो गलो ग्राहः इतियोगे च सद्विधिः | मिथस्ते न विभाष्यन्ते गवाक्षः संशितव्रतः|| M. Bh, on P, III. 3.156; VII.4.41.
vyastaseparated into its constituent elements; separated by a new insertion; a recital of the Vedic text by separating a coalesced vowel, which is looked upon as a fault of recital.
vyākaraṇadarśanathe science of Vyakarana with the element of Sphota introduced in it and brought consequently on a par with the other Darsanas by the stalwart grammar-scholar Bhartrhari of the 7th century A. D. For details see Sarvadarsanasangraha ' Paninidarsanam ' and page 385 Vol. VII. of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya edited by the D. ESociety, Poona.
vyākaraṇamahābhāṣyapradīpoddyotathe wellknown scholarly commentary by the stalwart grammarian Nagesabhatta on the Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata. See उद्द्योत and नागेश.
vyāyataseparated; one out of the two | conjoined consonants separated by inserting a vowel in between; confer, compare व्यस्यन्त्यन्तर्महतोs व्यायतं तं दीर्घायु: सूर्यो रुशदीर्त ऊर्जम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 19, where Uvvata gives the explanation-दीर्घात्परं अव्यायतं अपृथग्भूतं रफेण सक्तमित्यर्थः एवंभूतं व्यस्यन्ति पृथक्कुर्वन्ति | यथा | दीरिघायु: ! सूरिय: | रुशदीरिते | ऊरजम्. Rk Samhita I. 85. 39, X. 158. 1, IX. 91.3 and IX. 63. 2. व्यावर्तन reversing the order of words and going back from a subsequent word to the previous one, as in the Krama,.Jata and other artificial recitals of Veda.
vyūha(l)resolution or determination: confer, compare अकृतव्यूहाः पाणिनीयाः । न कृतो विाशीष्ट ऊहो निश्चयः ,शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिविषये यैः इत्यर्थः Par. Sek. Pari. 56; (2) separation of the phonetic elements in a word, done especially for the recital of the Vedic texts according to metre:confer, compare व्यूहैः संपत्समीक्ष्योने क्षेप्रवणैकंभाविनाम् । व्यूहैः पृथक्करणेन Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VIII.22.
ś(1)a sibilant letter of the palatal class, possessed of the properties, श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष and कण्ठविवृतत्व; (2) the initial indicatory ( इत् ) letter श् of a non-taddhita affix in Panini's grammar, which is dropped; (3) substitute for च्छ् when followed by an affix beginning with a nasal consonant; e.g प्रश्न:, confer, compare P.VI.4.19;(4) substitute for स् when followed by श् or any palatal letter;exempli gratia, for example वृक्षश्छादयति वृक्षश्शेते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. VIII. 4.40.
śabdapārāyaṇarecital or enumeration of one word after another in a language: cf ब्रुहस्पतरिन्द्राय दिव्यं वर्षसहस्रं प्रतिपदोक्तानां शब्दानां शब्दपारायणं प्रोवाच नान्तं जगाम M.Bh. Ahnika 1.
śikhāone of the subdivisions of the artificial recitals of the Vedic texts.
śīghrīa person reciting Vedic passages more rapidly, when his recital results into a fault of utterance.
śūnautterance with a swollen mouth which is looked upon as a fault of Vedic recital: confer, compare दुष्टं मुखेन सुषिरेण शूनम् R.Pr.XIV.2.
śaiśirīyarecital of the Rgveda in the school named after SiSira, a pupil of Sakalya.
ścutvathe substitution of the palatal consonants श्,च्,छ्,ज्, झ् and ञ् respectively for the similar consonants स्, त् , थ् , द् , ध् and न् of the dental class; confer, compare स्तोः श्चुना श्चु: P.VIII.4.10.
śravaṇahearing of a phonetic element or a word in the actual speech; audition; confer, compare तस्य चोदात्तस्वरितपरत्वे श्रवणं स्पष्टम् S. K. on P.I.2.32. In many technical grammatical terms, affixes and substitutes, there is sometimes a portion of them which is not a vital part of the word, but it is for the sake of causing certain prescribed grammatical operations. The letters or syllables which form such a portion are called इत् and they are only for the sake of grammatical operations (कार्यार्थ ), as contrasted with the other ones which are actually heard (श्रुत्यर्थ or श्रवणार्थ ).
ślathabandhaa loose connection as obtaining between the various words in the Pada recital, as contrasted with श्लिष्टबन्ध in the Samhita text.
ṣṭutvacerebralization of the dental consonants as prescribed by the rule ष्टुना ष्टु: P. VIII. 4. 41; e. g. कोयष्टिकष्टीकते, पेष्टा, उङ्ङीनः etc; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII. 4.41.
s(l)a sibilant letter of the dental class of consonants possessed of the properties श्वास, अघोष, कण्ठविवार and महाप्राण ; ( 2 ) substitute for visarjaniya if followed by a hard consonant excepting a sibilant confer, compare P. VIII. 3. 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 46, 47, 48-54,
saṃkrama(1)joining with a subsequent word after omitting a word or two occurring between; cf, गलत्पदमतिक्रम्य अगलता सह संधानं संक्रम:; e. g. शूद्रे अर्ये for शूर्द्रे यदर्ये where यत् is passed over in the krama and other recitals; cf Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 77, 165, 194; (2) a term used in ancient grammars for such affixes and others which do not allow the substitution of guna or vrddhi for the preceding vowel; the term is also used for the letters क्, ग् and ङ् when they are mute, serving only the purpose of preventing guna or vrddhi; confer, compare मृजेरजादौ संक्रमे विभाषा वृद्धिमारभन्ते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3. Vart. 10.
saṃtānacontinuity; line; continuous recital.
samayathe omission of words which have already occurred before in the recital of the Pada and other Pathas or recitals, with a view to avoiding an unnecessary repetition; confer, compareदृष्टक्रमत्वात्समयान् संदध्यात् सर्वशः क्रमे। पदेन व पदाभ्यां च प्रागवस्येदतीत्य च R.Pr.X.12.
samudāyaaggregate, totality, collection of individual members: confer, compare समुदाये प्रवृत्ताः शब्दाः क्वचिदवयवेष्वपि वर्तन्ते also confer, compare समुदाये व्याकरणशब्दः अवयवे नोपपद्यते M.Bh. Ahnika 1 Vart, 14: confer, compare also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः।Par.Sek.Pari.108.
sāyaṇa,sāyaṇācāryathe celebrated Vedic scholar and grammarian of Vijayanagar who flourished in the 14th century and wrote, besides the monumental commentary works on the Vedas, a grammatical work on roots and their forms known by the name माधवीया धातुवृत्ति. As the colophon of the work shows, the Dhatuvrtti was written by Sayanacarya, but published under the name of Madhava, the brother of Sayanacarya: confer, compare इति महामन्त्रिणा मायणसुतेन माधवसहोदरेण सायणाचार्येण विरचितायां माधवीयायां धातुवृत्तौ...Madhaviya Dha tuvrtti at the end; cf also तेन मायणपुत्रेण सायणेन मनीषिणा । व्याख्येया माधवी चेयं धातुवृत्तिर्विरच्यते । Mad. Dhatuvrtti at the beginning.
sārāsāravivekaname of a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara written by बालशास्त्री रानडे, the stalwart grammarian of the nineteenth century at Varanasi.
sūtrapāṭhathe text of Panini's Sutras handed down by oral tradition from the preceptor to the pupil. Although it is said that the actual text of Panini was modified from time to time, still it can be said with certainty that it was fixed at the time of the Bhasyakara who has noted a few different readings only. The Sutra text approved by the Bhasyakara was followed by the authors of the Kasika excepting in a few cases. It is customary with learned Pandits and grammarians to say that the recital of the Sutras of Panini was originally a continuous one in the form of a Samhitatext and it was later on, that it was split up into the different Sutras, which explains according to them the variation in the number of Sutras which is due to the different ways of splitting the Sutrapatha.
stua term used for the sibilant स् and dental class consonants for thc substitution of the sibilant श् and palatal consonants in respective order confer, compare स्तोः श्चुना श्चुः P. VIII. 4.40.
sthānaplace of articulation; place of the production of sound, which is one of the chief factors in the production of sound; confer, compare अनुप्रदानात् संसर्गात् स्थानात् करणविन्ययात् | जायते वर्णवैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च पञ्चमात्, T.Pr. XXIII. 2. Generally there are given five places of the production of sound viz. कण्ठ, तालु, मूर्धन् , दन्त and ओष्ठ, respectively for the articulation of guttural, palatal cerebral, dental and labial letters and नासिका as an additional one for the articulation of the nasal consonants ञू, मू,ङू, णू and नू For the Jihvamuliya sound (क ), जिंह्वामूल is given as a specific one. For details and minor differences of views, see Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.III, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) 1.18 to 20,Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 2-10; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 65 to 84 and M. Bh, on P. I. 1. 9. (2) place, substratum, which is generally understood as the sense of the genitive case-affix in rules which prescribe substitutes; confer, compare षष्ठी स्थोनोयागा. P. I. 1. 49.
sthānivadbhāvabehaviour of the substitute like the original in respect of holding the qualities of the original and causing grammatical operations by virtue of those qualities. By means of स्थानिवद्भाव,the substitute for a root is,for instance, looked upon as a root; similarly, a noun-base or an affix or so, is looked upon like the original and it can cause such operations or be a recipient of such operations as are due to its being a root or a noun or an affix or the like. This स्यानिवद्भाव cannot be, and is not made also, a universally applicable feature; and there are limitations or restrictions put upon it, the chief of them being अल्विधौ or in the matter of such operations as are caused by the 'property of being a single letter' (अल्विधौ). There are two views regarding this 'behaviour like the original' : (l) supposed behaviour which is only instrumental in causing operations or undergoing them which is called शास्त्रातिदेदा and (2) actual restoration to the form of the original under certain conditions only as prescribed which is called रूपातिदेश. The रूपातिदेश is actually resorted to by some grammarians in the case of the reduplication of roots; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on द्विवेचनेचि P.I.1.59 and M.Bh. on P.I.1.59.See the word रूपातिदेश also. For details see Vol. VII p.p. 241243, Vyākarana Mahabhasya D.E. Society's Edition.
sphoṭaname given to the radical Sabda which communicates the meaning to the hearers as different from ध्वनि or the sound in ordinary experience.The Vaiyakaranas,who followed Panini and who were headed by Bhartihari entered into discussions regarding the philosophy of Grammar, and introduced by way of deduction from Panini's grammar, an important theory that शब्द which communicates the meaning is different from the sound which is produced and heard and which is merely instrumental in the manifestation of an internal voice which is called Sphota.स्फुटयतेनेन अर्थः: इति स्फोटः or स्फोटः शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायमादुपजायते Vakyapadiya; confer, compare also अभिव्यक्तवादको मध्यमावस्थ आन्तर: शब्द: Kaiyata's Pradipa. For, details see Vakyapadiya I and Sabdakaustubha Ahnika 1. It is doubtful whether this Sphota theory was. advocated before Panini. The word स्फोटायन has been put by Panini in the rule अवङ् स्फोटायनस्य only incidentally and, in fact, nothing can be definitely deduced from it although Haradatta says that स्फोटायन was the originator of the स्फोटवाद. The word स्फोट is not actually found in the Pratisakhya works. However, commentators on the Pratisakhya works have introduced it in their explanations of the texts which describe वर्णोत्पत्ति or production of sound; confer, compare commentary on R.Pr.XIII.4, T.Pr. II.1. Grammarians have given various kinds of sphota; confer, compare स्फोटो द्विधा | व्यक्तिस्फोटो जातिस्फोटश्च। व्यक्तिस्पोटः सखण्ड अखण्डश्च । सखण्ड। वर्णपदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा। अखण्ड: पदवाक्यभेदेन द्विधा ! एवं पञ्च व्यक्तिस्फोटाः| जातिस्फोट: वर्णपदवाक्यभेदेन त्रिधा। इत्येवमष्टौ स्फोटः तत्र अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट एव मुख्य इति नव्याः । वाक्य जातिस्फोट इति तु प्राञ्चः॥; confer, compare also पदप्रकृतिः संहिता इति प्रातिशाख्यमत्र मानम् । पदानां प्रकृतिरिति षष्ठीतत्पुरुषे अखण्डवाक्यस्फोटपक्षः । बहुव्रीहौ सखण्डबाक्यस्फोट:||
sphoṭavādaa general name given to treatises discussing the nature of Sphota written by the Vaiyakaranas who defend and establish the theory of Sphota and by the Naiyayikas who criticise the theory. Famous among these works are (l) स्फोटवाद by a stalwart Grammarian Kondabhatta, the author of the Vaiyakaramabhusana and (2) स्फोटवाद by NageSa, the reputed grammarian of the eighteenth century.
svapāṭhathe original recital of the Veda; the Samhitapatha as opposed to the Padapatha which is looked upon more or less as artificial.
svarasahitoccāraṇarecital of the veda Samhita text with intonation or accents, as contrasted with एकश्रुत्युच्चारण which is specially prescribed in a few cases; tonal system showing distinction between words of different senses although pronounced alike, in the Samhita text. exempli gratia, for example नतेन and न तेन.
svaritapratijñāthe conventional dictum that a particular rule or part of a rule, is marked with the accent स्वरित which enables the grammarians to decide that that rule or that part of a rule is to occur in each of the subsequent Sutras, the limit of continuation being ascertained from convention. It is possible that Panini in his original recital of the Astadhyayi recited the words in the rules with the necessary accents; probably he recited every word, which was not to proceed further, with one acute or with one circumflex vowel, while, the words which were to proceed to the next rule or rules, were marked with an actual circumflex accent ( स्वरित ), or with a neutralization of the acute and the grave accents (स्वरितत्व), that is, probably without accents or by एकश्रुति or by प्रचय; cf स्वरितेनाधिकार: P. I.3.II and the Mahabhasya thereon.
the last of the spirant consonants, | which is a glottal, voiced letter called also ऊष्म or spirant of a partial contact, i. e. possessed of the properties कण्ठय, नादानुप्रदान, ऊष्म and ईषत्स्पृष्टत्व. This letter has been given twice in the Paninian alphabet, viz. the Mahesvara Sutras, and the Bhasyakara has given the purpose of it, viz. the technical utility of being included among soft consonants along with semi-vowels, nasals and the fifth, the fourth, and the third class-consonants (हश् अश् et cetera, and others),as also among the hard consonants along with the fourth and the third class-letters and spirants ( झ्लू, ). The second letter हू in हल् appears, however, to have only a technical utility,as the purpose of its place there among spirants is served by the jihvamuliya and the Upadhmaniya letters which are,in fact, the velar and the labial spirants respectively, besides the other three शू, षू and सू .The Rk Pratisakhya calls ह as a chest sound. For details, see Mahabhasya on the Siva Sutra हयवरट् Varttikas 1, 2 and 3.
haria short form used for भर्तृहरि, the stalwart grammarian Bhartrhari,by later grammarians and commentators in their references to him. See the word भर्तृहरि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
hemacandraa Jain sage and scholar of remarkable erudition in the religious works of the Jainas as also in several Shastras. He was a resident of Dhandhuka in Gujarat, who, like Sankarācārya took संन्यासदीक्षा at a very early age and wrote a very large number of original books and commentaries, the total number of which may well nigh exceed fifty, during his long life of eighty-four years ( 1088 to ll 2 ). He stayed at AnhilavalaPattana in the North Gujarat and was patronised with extreme reverence by King Kumarapala who in fact, became his devoted pupil. Besides the well-known works on the various Shastras like Kavyanusasana, Abhidhanacintamani, Desinamamla, Yogasastra, Dvyasrayakavya, Trisastisalakapurusacarita and others which are well-known, he wrote a big work on grammar called सिद्धहेमचन्द्र by him,but popularly known by the name हेमव्याकरण or हैमशब्दानुशासन The , work consists of eight books or Adhyayas, out of which the eighth book is devoted to prakrit Grammar, and can be styled as a Grammar of all the Prakrit dialects. The Sanskrit Grammar of seven chapters is based practically upon Panini's Astadhyayi, the rules or sutras referring to Vedic words or Vedic affixes or accents being entirely omittedThe wording of the Sutras is much similar to that of Panini; at some places it is even identical. The order of the treatment of the subjects in the सिद्धहैम. शब्दानुशासनमृत्र is not, however, similar to that obtaining in the Astadhyayi of Panini. It is somewhat topicwise as in the Katantra Vyakarana. The first Adhyaya and a quarter of the second are devoted to Samjna, Paribhasa and declension; the second pada of the second Adhyaya is devoted to karaka, while the third pada of it is devoted to cerebralization and the fourth to the Stripratyayas.The first two Padas of the third Adhyaya are devoted to Samasas or compound words, while the last two Padas of the third Adhyaya and the fourth Adhyaya are devoted to conjugation The fifth Adhyaya is devoted to verbal derivatives or krdanta, while the sixth and the seventh Adhyayas are devoted to formations of nouns from nouns, or taddhita words. On this Sabda nusasana, which is just like Panini's Astadhyayi, the eighth adhyaya of Hemacandra being devoted to the grammar of the Arsa language similar to Vedic grammar of Panini, Hemacandra has himself written two glosses which are named लधुवृति and वृहृदवृत्ति and the famous commentary known as the Brhannyasa. Besides these works viz the हैमशब्दानुशासन, the two Vrttis on it and the Brhannyasa, he has given an appendix viz the Lingnusasana. The Grammar of Hemacandra, in short, introduced a new system of grammar different from, yet similar to, that of Panini, which by his followers was made completely similar to the Paniniya system by writing works similar to the Siddhantakaumudi, the Dhatuvrtti, the Manorama and the Paribhasendusekhara. हेमहंसगणि a grammarian belonging to the school of Hemacandra, who lived in the fifteenth century and wrote a work on Paribhasas named न्यायसंग्रह, on which he himself wrote a commentary called न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा and another one called by the name न्यास.
Vedabase Search
306 results
tala and hand cymbalsSB 10.75.10
tala from His palmsSB 10.36.8
tala of their palmsSB 10.72.38
talakaḥ TalakaSB 12.1.21-26
talaloka-pālāḥ the leaders of the lower planetsSB 2.6.43-45
talaloka-pālāḥ the leaders of the lower planetsSB 2.6.43-45
talam at the baseSB 10.29.36
talām the solesSB 10.30.30
talam the surfaceSB 10.66.34
talātalam TalātalaSB 5.24.7
talātalam the fourth planetary system belowSB 2.5.40-41
talātalam the planets named TalātalaSB 2.1.26
talātale in the planet known as TalātalaSB 5.24.28
tale at the baseCC Madhya 19.127
tale at the bottomCC Antya 16.41
tale belowCC Antya 9.30
tale in the part underneathBs 5.43
CC Madhya 21.49
tale on the groundCC Madhya 21.128
tale the surfaceCC Antya 6.45
tale underneathCC Antya 9.14
CC Madhya 2.54
talena with His palmSB 10.44.24-25
talete to the groundCC Madhya 11.119
talpa bedSB 10.60.1
talpāt from the bedSB 10.4.3
SB 10.89.8-9
talpe (lying) on the bedSB 10.6.7
talpe in bedSB 10.71.33
talpe on the bed ofSB 3.8.10
talpe on your bedSB 9.18.30
talpeṣu upon bedsSB 10.15.16
ādarśa-tala-upamā whose surface is just like the surface of a mirrorSB 5.20.35
sutala-ālayam to the place known as SutalaSB 8.23.9
āmli-talāya at the place known as Āmli-talāCC Madhya 18.83
āmlitalāya at ĀmlitalāCC Madhya 9.224
kuntala-maṇḍita-ānanām whose beautiful face was surrounded by black hairSB 10.6.4
āńcala-tale at the skirtCC Madhya 4.131
ańghri-tale beneath the feet, or on the soleSB 8.20.23
mahā-arha-talpe on a valuable bedsteadSB 4.27.4
aśokera tale underneath an aśoka treeCC Antya 19.85
atalam the planets named AtalaSB 2.1.27
atalam the first planetary system below the earthSB 2.5.40-41
atalam named AtalaSB 5.24.7
atale on the planet named AtalaSB 5.24.16
avani-tala the surface of the globeSB 5.1.6
avani-tala the surface of the globeSB 5.4.1
avani-tala the surface of the globeSB 5.7.1
avani-tale on the groundSB 5.16.19
bakula-tale underneath a bakula flower treeCC Madhya 16.102
bhū-tale on the surface of the earthSB 1.17.8
bhū-tale on this earthSB 4.25.12
bhū-tale on the groundSB 4.26.17
bhū-talam the surface of the earthSB 9.9.4
bhū-tale on the surface of the earthSB 10.14.37
bhū-tale onto the groundSB 10.36.13
bhū-tale onto the groundSB 10.43.13
bhū-tale to the groundSB 10.72.42
bhū-talam on the groundSB 10.77.34
bhū-tale upon the surface of the earthSB 12.3.39-40
bhūtale on this planetSB 1.13.9
candana-śītalam as cool as sandalwood pulpCC Adi 4.259
gopī-candana-tale under heaps of gopī-candana (yellowish clay used for tilaka)CC Madhya 9.247
cautarā-talāne at the base of the platformCC Antya 6.66
ciyaḍatalā named CiyaḍatalāCC Madhya 9.220
dharā-talam the surface of the earthSB 3.17.11
eka eka vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 14.99
eka eka vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 14.99
gagana-tale under the canopy of the skySB 5.1.8
gagana-tale beneath the sky or on the groundSB 8.11.31
guru-talpa-gaḥ one who indulges in sex with the wife of his teacher or guruSB 6.2.9-10
gopī-candana-tale under heaps of gopī-candana (yellowish clay used for tilaka)CC Madhya 9.247
guru-talpa-gaḥ one who indulges in sex with the wife of his teacher or guruSB 6.2.9-10
kadambera tale underneath a kadamba treeCC Antya 15.55
kara-talena by the palm of the handSB 3.20.36
kara-pada-tala the palms and the soles of the feetCC Antya 15.76
kara-tala in the palms of one's handsMM 51
karatalī-kṛtya taking in his handSB 8.7.42
su-śītala karite to make it very coolCC Madhya 15.73
kāṣṭha-putalī-samāna is exactly like a wooden dollCC Antya 20.92
kāṣṭhera putalī a doll made of woodCC Antya 4.85
keha tale some at the base of the platformCC Antya 6.70
karatalī-kṛtya taking in his handSB 8.7.42
kṣiti-tala the planet earthSB 2.7.1
kṣiti-talam the surface of the earthSB 10.15.29
kṣmā-talam the surface of the earthSB 12.9.12
kṣoṇi-tale on the surface of the globeSB 4.21.36
kuntala of hairSB 3.28.30
kuntala-maṇḍita-ānanām whose beautiful face was surrounded by black hairSB 10.6.4
kuntala within His locks of hairSB 10.15.42
kuntala and of the locks of their hairSB 10.33.21
kuntala by locksSB 10.39.20
kuntala of the locks of her hairSB 10.53.51-55
kuntala and of the locks of His hairSB 10.62.29-30
kuntala and locks of hairSB 10.75.33
kuntala with locks of hairSB 10.83.29
kuntala of the locks of hairSB 10.90.11
kuntala with locks of hairSB 11.30.28-32
kuntalaiḥ hairSB 2.2.11
kuntalaiḥ with locks of hairSB 10.31.12
pariṣvakta-sahasra-kuntalam brilliantly illuminated by scattered, fully grown hairSB 10.3.6
kuntalam with locks of hairSB 10.31.15
kuntalam whose locks of hairSB 10.89.54-56
kuṭila-kuntalam adorned with curled hairCC Adi 4.152
kuṭila-kuntalam adorned with curly hairCC Madhya 21.124
kuṭila-kuntalam adorned with curled hairCC Adi 4.152
kuṭila-kuntalam adorned with curly hairCC Madhya 21.124
mahā-arha-talpe on a valuable bedsteadSB 4.27.4
mahātalam the planets named MahātalaSB 2.1.26
mahātalam the fifth planetary system belowSB 2.5.40-41
mahātalam MahātalaSB 5.24.7
mahātale in the planet known as MahātalaSB 5.24.29
mahī-tale upon the groundSB 7.5.33
mahī-tale upon this earthSB 9.9.4
mahī-tale onto the groundSB 10.37.32
mahī-tale the earthSB 11.17.5-6
mahītalam the planetary system named MahītalaSB 2.1.27
mahītalam the material worldSB 5.1.23
mahītale the earthSB 11.7.5
kuntala-maṇḍita-ānanām whose beautiful face was surrounded by black hairSB 10.6.4
taliḥ the charioteer MātaliSB 8.11.18
talim unto the chariot driver MātaliSB 8.11.22
talinā by his chariot driver named MātaliSB 8.11.16
talinā by Mātali, the chariot driver of IndraSB 9.10.21
nabhaḥ-talam the skySB 10.15.38
nabhaḥ-talā the skySB 10.20.3
nabhastalam outer spaceSB 2.1.27
nabhastalam the skySB 6.9.13-17
nabhastalam the skySB 7.8.36
pāda-talataḥ on the bottom or soles of the feetSB 2.5.40-41
pada-tale under the shelter of the lotus feetCC Adi 10.91
pada-tala the soles of His feetCC Madhya 2.34
pada-tala His footCC Madhya 13.83
kara-pada-tala the palms and the soles of the feetCC Antya 15.76
prabhu-pāda-tale at the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 19.68
pāṇi-talaiḥ and hand cymbalsSB 10.18.10
pariṣvakta-sahasra-kuntalam brilliantly illuminated by scattered, fully grown hairSB 10.3.6
pātāla-talam the planet PātālaSB 11.3.10
tala thinCC Antya 10.36
piṇḍā-tale at the foot of the raised place where Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was sittingCC Antya 1.111
piṇḍāra tale below the platformCC Antya 4.23
prabhu-pāda-tale at the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 19.68
prati-vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 13.204
prati-vṛkṣa-tale underneath each treeCC Madhya 14.98
putalī a dollCC Antya 1.203
kāṣṭhera putalī a doll made of woodCC Antya 4.85
putalī the dollCC Antya 4.85
putalī dollCC Antya 12.85
kāṣṭha-putalī-samāna is exactly like a wooden dollCC Antya 20.92
puttalī a dollCC Adi 8.79
rahilā tale remain at the bottomCC Madhya 18.41
rasātala of the lowest regionSB 1.3.7
rasātala to hellCC Madhya 16.131
rasātalam the planets named RasātalaSB 2.1.26
rasātalam the sixth planetary system belowSB 2.5.40-41
rasātalam to the depths of the oceanSB 3.18.1
rasātalam RasātalaSB 5.24.7
rasātalam to the lower region of the universeSB 9.7.2
rasātalam to Pātāla, the lower part of the universeSB 9.9.4
rasātalam the subterranean regionSB 10.89.43-44
rasātalāt from the bottom of the oceanSB 3.20.8
rasātalāt from the plutonic regionSB 4.17.34
rasātalāt from the lowest planetary system (Rasātala)SB 5.18.6
rasātale on the planet called RasātalaSB 5.24.30
pariṣvakta-sahasra-kuntalam brilliantly illuminated by scattered, fully grown hairSB 10.3.6
śrī-śakuntalā uvāca Śrī Śakuntalā repliedSB 9.20.13
śakuntalā your wife, ŚakuntalāSB 9.20.22
śakuntalām the girl ŚakuntalāSB 9.20.16
śakuntalām ŚakuntalāSB 9.20.21
kāṣṭha-putalī-samāna is exactly like a wooden dollCC Antya 20.92
śītala samīra very cool breezeCC Madhya 18.77
śītala coolCC Adi 4.247
su-śītala very, very coolCC Adi 4.247
śītala very coolCC Madhya 1.159
su-śītala cool and pleasingCC Madhya 2.34
śītala coldCC Madhya 4.38
śītala coolCC Madhya 4.164
śītala coolCC Madhya 12.106
śītala coolCC Madhya 12.133
śītala-vāyu cool breezeCC Madhya 13.203
śītala coolCC Madhya 14.97
su-śītala karite to make it very coolCC Madhya 15.73
śītala coldCC Madhya 15.220
śītala samīra very cool breezeCC Madhya 18.77
śītala very coolCC Antya 4.123
śītala coldCC Antya 14.100
su-śītala very coolCC Antya 15.21
su-śītala cool and pleasingCC Antya 15.76
śītalāḥ coolSB 10.22.37
candana-śītalam as cool as sandalwood pulpCC Adi 4.259
śītalam cool and calmCC Madhya 12.1
śrī-śakuntalā uvāca Śrī Śakuntalā repliedSB 9.20.13
su-śītala very, very coolCC Adi 4.247
su-śītala cool and pleasingCC Madhya 2.34
su-śītala karite to make it very coolCC Madhya 15.73
su-śītala very coolCC Antya 15.21
su-śītala cool and pleasingCC Antya 15.76
sutala-ālayam to the place known as SutalaSB 8.23.9
sutalam the planetary system named SutalaSB 2.1.27
sutalam the third planetary system belowSB 2.5.40-41
sutalam SutalaSB 5.24.7
sutalam in the planet known as SutalaSB 8.22.32
sutalam in the planet known as SutalaSB 8.22.33
sutalam the planet SutalaSB 8.23.3
sutalam the subterranean planet of Sutala, ruled by Bali MahārājaSB 10.85.34
sutale on the planet known as SutalaSB 5.24.18
sutale in the kingdom of SutalaSB 8.13.14
kṣiti-tala the planet earthSB 2.7.1
avani-tala the surface of the globeSB 5.1.6
avani-tala the surface of the globeSB 5.4.1
avani-tala the surface of the globeSB 5.7.1
ādarśa-tala-upamā whose surface is just like the surface of a mirrorSB 5.20.35
nabhaḥ-talā the skySB 10.20.3
pada-tala the soles of His feetCC Madhya 2.34
pada-tala His footCC Madhya 13.83
kara-pada-tala the palms and the soles of the feetCC Antya 15.76
kara-tala in the palms of one's handsMM 51
pāṇi-talaiḥ and hand cymbalsSB 10.18.10
dharā-talam the surface of the earthSB 3.17.11
vasudhā-talam all over the surface of the globeSB 4.24.10
vasudhā-talam the lower planetary systemSB 5.1.30
bhū-talam the surface of the earthSB 9.9.4
kṣiti-talam the surface of the earthSB 10.15.29
nabhaḥ-talam the skySB 10.15.38
bhū-talam on the groundSB 10.77.34
pātāla-talam the planet PātālaSB 11.3.10
kṣmā-talam the surface of the earthSB 12.9.12
cautarā-talāne at the base of the platformCC Antya 6.66
pāda-talataḥ on the bottom or soles of the feetSB 2.5.40-41
teńtulī-talāte underneath the Teńtulī treeCC Madhya 18.75
āmli-talāya at the place known as Āmli-talāCC Madhya 18.83
bhū-tale on the surface of the earthSB 1.17.8
kṣoṇi-tale on the surface of the globeSB 4.21.36
bhū-tale on this earthSB 4.25.12
bhū-tale on the groundSB 4.26.17
gagana-tale under the canopy of the skySB 5.1.8
avani-tale on the groundSB 5.16.19
mahī-tale upon the groundSB 7.5.33
gagana-tale beneath the sky or on the groundSB 8.11.31
ańghri-tale beneath the feet, or on the soleSB 8.20.23
mahī-tale upon this earthSB 9.9.4
bhū-tale on the surface of the earthSB 10.14.37
bhū-tale onto the groundSB 10.36.13
mahī-tale onto the groundSB 10.37.32
bhū-tale onto the groundSB 10.43.13
bhū-tale to the groundSB 10.72.42
mahī-tale the earthSB 11.17.5-6
bhū-tale upon the surface of the earthSB 12.3.39-40
pada-tale under the shelter of the lotus feetCC Adi 10.91
vṛkṣa-tale underneath a treeCC Adi 17.47
taru-tale underneath the treeCC Madhya 1.58
vṛkṣa-tale under the shade of a treeCC Madhya 4.23
āńcala-tale at the skirtCC Madhya 4.131
gopī-candana-tale under heaps of gopī-candana (yellowish clay used for tilaka)CC Madhya 9.247
tāra tale below themCC Madhya 12.159
tāra tale below themCC Madhya 12.159
taru-tale underneath the treeCC Madhya 13.121
prati-vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 13.204
prati-vṛkṣa-tale underneath each treeCC Madhya 14.98
eka eka vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 14.99
bakula-tale underneath a bakula flower treeCC Madhya 16.102
rahilā tale remain at the bottomCC Madhya 18.41
tāra tale underneath that treeCC Madhya 18.76
teńtula-tale underneath the tamarind treeCC Madhya 18.78
vṛkṣa-tale underneath a treeCC Madhya 18.159
tāra tale below Vṛndāvana-dhāmaCC Madhya 21.46
tāra tale below the spiritual worldCC Madhya 21.52
taru-tale underneath the treeCC Antya 1.78
piṇḍā-tale at the foot of the raised place where Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was sittingCC Antya 1.111
piṇḍāra tale below the platformCC Antya 4.23
keha tale some at the base of the platformCC Antya 6.70
vṛkṣa-tale under a treeCC Antya 12.18
kadambera tale underneath a kadamba treeCC Antya 15.55
prabhu-pāda-tale at the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 19.68
aśokera tale underneath an aśoka treeCC Antya 19.85
kara-talena by the palm of the handSB 3.20.36
guru-talpa-gaḥ one who indulges in sex with the wife of his teacher or guruSB 6.2.9-10
yoga-talpāt from the bedstead of mystic slumberSB 2.10.13
mahā-arha-talpe on a valuable bedsteadSB 4.27.4
tāra tale below themCC Madhya 12.159
tāra tale below themCC Madhya 12.159
tāra tale underneath that treeCC Madhya 18.76
tāra tale below Vṛndāvana-dhāmaCC Madhya 21.46
tāra tale below the spiritual worldCC Madhya 21.52
taru-tale underneath the treeCC Madhya 1.58
taru-tale underneath the treeCC Madhya 13.121
taru-tale underneath the treeCC Antya 1.78
teńtula-tale underneath the tamarind treeCC Madhya 18.78
teńtulī-talāte underneath the Teńtulī treeCC Madhya 18.75
ādarśa-tala-upamā whose surface is just like the surface of a mirrorSB 5.20.35
śrī-śakuntalā uvāca Śrī Śakuntalā repliedSB 9.20.13
vasudhā-talam all over the surface of the globeSB 4.24.10
vasudhā-talam the lower planetary systemSB 5.1.30
śītala-vāyu cool breezeCC Madhya 13.203
vitalam the planetary system named VitalaSB 2.1.27
vitalam the second planetary system belowSB 2.5.40-41
vitalam VitalaSB 5.24.7
vitale on the planetSB 5.24.17
vṛkṣa-tale underneath a treeCC Adi 17.47
vṛkṣa-tale under the shade of a treeCC Madhya 4.23
prati-vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 13.204
prati-vṛkṣa-tale underneath each treeCC Madhya 14.98
eka eka vṛkṣa-tale under each and every treeCC Madhya 14.99
vṛkṣa-tale underneath a treeCC Madhya 18.159
vṛkṣa-tale under a treeCC Antya 12.18
yoga-talpāt from the bedstead of mystic slumberSB 2.10.13
142 results
tala noun (masculine neuter) base (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
bottom (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
flat roof (of a house) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
level (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
lower part (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a hell surface (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the base of a house (adhiṣṭhāna) the palm (of the hand) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the part underneath (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the sole (of the foot) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 382/72933
talabhasman noun (neuter) a kind of rasabhasman
Frequency rank 24081/72933
talaghāta noun (masculine) a kind of musical instrument (?) a slap with the palm or paw (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 53374/72933
talagāna noun (masculine) name of a people
Frequency rank 53373/72933
talahṛd noun (neuter) [medic.] name of a marman
Frequency rank 28173/72933
talahṛdaya noun (neuter) the centre of the sole of the foot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
[medic.] name of a marman
Frequency rank 24082/72933
talaka noun (neuter) a kind of salt (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a pond (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 53371/72933
talakoṭa noun (masculine) a kind of plant; aṅkoṭha
Frequency rank 53372/72933
talapoṭaka noun (masculine) a kind of plant
Frequency rank 53376/72933
talatra noun (neuter) a leather guard (used in archery)
Frequency rank 21372/72933
talatāla noun (masculine) clapping the hands (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 53375/72933
talavara noun (masculine) [geogr.] name of a people
Frequency rank 53377/72933
talin adjective
Frequency rank 35331/72933
talka noun (neuter) a forest (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 53380/72933
tallaiṅga adjective
Frequency rank 35332/72933
tallaya adjective
Frequency rank 53381/72933
talpa noun (masculine) a couch (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a raft (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a wife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
an upper story (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
bed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
boat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
room on the top of a house (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sofa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the seat of a carriage (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
turret (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3841/72933
talpaja adjective born of a wife (by an appointed substitute) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28174/72933
talā noun (feminine) name of a daughter of Raudrāśva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the sole (of the foot) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a kind of divyauṣadhī (?)
Frequency rank 53370/72933
talāhvaya noun (masculine neuter) Flacourtia cataphracta (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 53379/72933
talātala noun (neuter) name of a hell (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 17946/72933
talāśrayā noun (feminine) a kind of plant
Frequency rank 72849/72933
talāṭā noun (feminine) a kind of animal
Frequency rank 53378/72933
atala noun (neuter) bottomless (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a hell beneath the earth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15386/72933
apittala adjective not pittala
Frequency rank 26462/72933
amṛtalatā noun (feminine) a creeping plant that gives nectar (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23166/72933
amṛtalālasā noun (feminine) [rel.] name of a Śakti of Śiva
Frequency rank 44646/72933
avātala adjective not flatulent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 45288/72933
avyaktalakṣaṇā noun (feminine) [rel.] name of Devī
Frequency rank 45533/72933
avyaktalakṣaṇa noun (masculine) name of Śiva (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 45534/72933
aśītala adjective hot (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 45600/72933
āpādatalamastakam indeclinable von Kopf bis Fuss
Frequency rank 17668/72933
ārāmaśītalā noun (masculine feminine) name of a plant with fragrant leaves (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 17677/72933
āhatalakṣaṇa adjective famed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
one whose marks or characteristics are mentioned (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
reputed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 33232/72933
upatalpa noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 33501/72933
uparitala noun (neuter) the upper surface (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 47603/72933
karatalā noun (feminine) knife (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 48642/72933
kāntalaka noun (masculine) the tree Cedrela Toona (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 33963/72933
kāntaloha noun (neuter) the loadstone (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
kānta cast iron [Gusseisen]
Frequency rank 5484/72933
kāntalohaka noun (neuter) kāntaloha
Frequency rank 49098/72933
kāntalauha noun (neuter) cast-iron (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23678/72933
kutala noun (neuter) getrocknete Sesampflanzen mit Wurzel und Stengeln
Frequency rank 49632/72933
kuntalin adjective wearing the kuntala hairdress
Frequency rank 27576/72933
kuntalī noun (feminine) a kind of plant (?)
Frequency rank 49664/72933
kuntala noun (masculine) (in music) a certain Dhruvaka (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a drinking cup (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a kind of perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a particular head-dress (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a plough (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a prince of that people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
barley (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
lock of hair (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of a people (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the hair of the head (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13452/72933
kuntalavardhana noun (masculine) Eclipta prostrata (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 34127/72933
kuntalikā noun (feminine) a species of plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
butter knife or scoop (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 34128/72933
kuntalośīra noun (neuter) a kind of plant a perfume (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 49665/72933
kṛtalakṣaṇa noun (masculine) name of a son of Mādrī
Frequency rank 49926/72933
garalasthitaloha noun (neuter) a kind of metal
Frequency rank 51142/72933
gurutalpin adjective
Frequency rank 21217/72933
gurutalpa noun (masculine) "a teacher's bed" (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a violator of his teacher's bed (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the violation of a teacher's bed (intercourse with his wife) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 10343/72933
cittala noun (masculine) a kind of antelope
Frequency rank 52284/72933
cittala adjective moderate (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 23965/72933
jagatītala noun (neuter) soil (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the ground (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 35075/72933
taptalomaśa noun (neuter) kāsīsa
Frequency rank 35299/72933
tiktalā noun (feminine) a kind of plant
Frequency rank 53522/72933
dantalekhanaka noun (neuter) a kind of surgical instrument (for removing tartar)
Frequency rank 54217/72933
dīptalocana noun (masculine) a cat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 54490/72933
dīptaloha noun (neuter) brass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the shining metal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 54491/72933
dharātala noun (masculine) the base of a house (adhiṣṭhāna)
Frequency rank 55333/72933
nabhastala noun (neuter) firmament (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of the 10th solar mansion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 6147/72933
nitala noun (neuter) one of the 7 divisions of the lower regions (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 24366/72933
nistala adjective below (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
down (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
globular (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
moving (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
not flat (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
round (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
trembling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 28756/72933
pattala adjective img/min.bmp
Frequency rank 36595/72933
pattalīkṛ verb (class 8 ātmanepada) img/alchemy.bmp
Frequency rank 21649/72933
pattalībhū verb (class 1 ātmanepada) img/alchemy.bmp
Frequency rank 57020/72933
pāṇitala noun (neuter) 1 karṣa a particular weight (2 Tolakas) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 12547/72933
pāratalpika noun (neuter) adultery (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 57802/72933
pittalā noun (feminine) Jussiaea Repens (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 36909/72933
pittala noun (masculine neuter) Betula Bhojpatra (its bark is used for writing upon) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
bell-metal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
brass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 8641/72933
pittala adjective bilious (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
secreting bile (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3755/72933
pittalaka noun (neuter) brass
Frequency rank 36910/72933
talī noun (feminine) name of a female demon
Frequency rank 58100/72933
tala adjective yellow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58101/72933
taloha noun (masculine neuter) brass queen's metal or a mixed metal resembling gold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
yellow metal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 15888/72933
puttalaka noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 58158/72933
paittala adjective brazen (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
made of brass (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58435/72933
pratala noun (masculine) the open hand with the fingers extended (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 58712/72933
brahmaproktaliṅgārcanavidhi noun (masculine) name of Liṅgapurāṇa, 1.73
Frequency rank 60428/72933
bhuvanakośagatāpātalanarakādinirūpaṇa noun (neuter) name of Garuḍapurāṇa, 1.57
Frequency rank 60816/72933
bhūtalikā noun (feminine) Trigonella Corniculata (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 60938/72933
matallikā noun (feminine) a kind of metre (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
anything excellent of its kind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 61226/72933
mahātala noun (neuter) name of the 6th of the 7 lower worlds or regions under the earth inhabited by the Nāgas etc. (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 19824/72933
tali noun (masculine) name of Indra's charioteer (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3488/72933
talīya adjective relating to or concerning Mātali (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 62001/72933
mṛtaloha noun (neuter) rekhāpūrṇa (?)
Frequency rank 38361/72933
raktala adjective
Frequency rank 38608/72933
raktalā noun (feminine) Sanseviera Roxburghiana (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 29848/72933
rasātala noun (neuter) ground (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of one of the seven hells or regions under the earth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
soil (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the 4th astrological mansion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the earth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the lower world or hell in general (not to be confounded with Naraka or the place of punishment) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 4260/72933
rāmaśītalikā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 63642/72933
vartaloha noun (neuter) a sort of brass or steel (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
bell metal (Somadeva (1999), 276) damaszierter Stahl (Garbe, Richard (1974), 40) a kind of metal; brass or another alloy
Frequency rank 12648/72933
vartalohaka noun (neuter) vartaloha
Frequency rank 17188/72933
tala adjective flatulent (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
stormy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
windy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 3767/72933
talā noun (feminine) a morbid state of the uterus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 39184/72933
tala noun (masculine) a sort of pulse (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Cicer Arietinum (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 65088/72933
vitala noun (neuter) name of one of the seven hells (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 17217/72933
vṛttaloha noun (neuter) a kind of metal
Frequency rank 39643/72933
vyāghratala noun (masculine neuter) a red variety of the castor-oil plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 22344/72933
śakuntalā noun (feminine) name of a daughter of the Apsaras Menakā by Viśvāmitra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 5149/72933
śaratalpa noun (masculine) a couch formed of arrow (esp. for a dead or wounded warrior) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 39919/72933
śaratalpika adjective concerning a śaratalpa
Frequency rank 67259/72933
śākuntali noun (masculine)
Frequency rank 67399/72933
śākuntala noun (masculine) metron. of Bharata (sovereign of India as son of) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 13196/72933
śākuntala noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 67400/72933
śītalī noun (feminine) a kind of kumbhaka Pistia Stratiotes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
small-pox (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 25609/72933
śītalā noun (feminine) kuṭumbinī and ārāma-śītalā (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a red cow (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Pistia Stratiotes (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
small-pox (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the goddess inflicting small-pox (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a kind of Stereospermum suaveolens D.C.
Frequency rank 20165/72933
śītala noun (neuter) a lotus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a pearl (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Costus Speciosus or Arabicus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cold weather (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
coldness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
sandal (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the root of Andropogon Muricatus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
?
Frequency rank 16189/72933
śītala adjective calm (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cold (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cold i.e. free from passion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cool (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cooling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
frosty (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
gentle (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
not causing painful feelings (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
not exciting emotion (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
shivering (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 976/72933
śītala noun (masculine) a kind of camphor (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a religious ceremony observed on the sun's entering Aries (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
bitumen (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Cordia Myxa (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
green sulphate of iron (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Michelia champaka Linn. (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the moon (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the resin of Shorea Robusta (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
the wind (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 25610/72933
śītalaka noun (masculine) marjoram (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67764/72933
śītalaka noun (neuter) a white lotus (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67765/72933
śītalacchada noun (masculine) Michelia champaka Linn. (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67766/72933
śītalatā noun (feminine) coldness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
insensibility (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 40067/72933
śītalatara adjective colder (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
more cool (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 40068/72933
śītalatva noun (neuter) apathy (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
coldness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
indifference (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 67767/72933
śītalay verb (denominative parasmaipada) to make cool
Frequency rank 67768/72933
śītalarajas noun (neuter) karpūra
Frequency rank 40069/72933
śītalīkaraṇa noun (neuter)
Frequency rank 67769/72933
śītalīkṛ verb (class 8 ātmanepada) to cool
Frequency rank 22416/72933
śītalībhū verb (class 1 ātmanepada) to become cool to cool down
Frequency rank 14491/72933
śṛtaśītala adjective
Frequency rank 67964/72933
śvetalodhra noun (masculine) a kind of Lodhra (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 40262/72933
śvetalohita noun (masculine) name of a Kalpa name of a Muni (a pupil of Śveta) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 17319/72933
satala adjective having a buttom (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 68635/72933
satalatrāṇa adjective
Frequency rank 68636/72933
saptalā noun (feminine) Abrus Precatorius (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Arabian jasmine (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
a soap-tree (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Bignonia Suaveolens (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
Mimosa Concinna (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
name of several plants (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 8356/72933
saptalikā noun (feminine) a kind of plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 68822/72933
saptaloka noun (masculine) the 7 worlds (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 25693/72933
samatalaka noun (neuter) [erotics] a kind of strike
Frequency rank 68885/72933
sasātala adjective
Frequency rank 69613/72933
talā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 10816/72933
sitalatā noun (feminine) a kind of plant (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 70521/72933
sutala noun (masculine neuter) the second of the seven divisions of the regions under the earth (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 14566/72933
suśītala adjective frigid (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
very cold or cooling (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 9516/72933
svabhāvaśītala adjective svāṅgaśītala ??
Frequency rank 13881/72933
svāṅgaśītala adjective svāṅgaśīta
Frequency rank 9292/72933
svāṅgaśītalaka adjective svāṅgaśītala
Frequency rank 72225/72933
svāṅgaśītalita adjective svāṅgaśītala
Frequency rank 72226/72933
haritalatā noun (feminine)
Frequency rank 72357/72933
hastalāghava noun (neuter) a real injury (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
cleverness (reckoned among the 64 Kalās) (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
lightness of hand (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))
manual readiness (Monier-Williams, Sir M. (1988))

Frequency rank 72438/72933
hitalohita noun (masculine) a kind of grain
Frequency rank 72560/72933
 

adhyavasāya

ascertainment; mental effort.

āgantu,āgantuka

stray; accidental; incidental; invasive; āgantu,āgantukajvara exogenous fever.

ajalambana

antimony; a chemical element with symmetalloid, it is found in nature mainly as the sulfide mineral stibnite.bol Sb (Latin: stibium). A lustrous gray

akika

agate stone; name derived from Achates river in Italy. They are associated with volcanic rock and belong to quartz variety.

amara

1. immortal, eternal, deathless; 2. quicksilver or mercury; 3. Plant a species of pine.

amṛtā

1. elixir of immortality; 2. Plant Tinospora cordifolia, guḍūci; 3. quicksilver; 4. water; 5.nectar.

anāla

having no stalk or stem.

aṇutalia

penetrating oil; a medicinal preparation applied into nostrils to improve the perception of senses and in several diseases that affect the head including grey hair, facial paralysis.

apunarbhava

a condition of cinder or ash (bhasma) from which it cannot be reverted to its metallic form.

ārogyaśāla

infirmary, hospital.

āturālaya

hospital.

āvāpa

1. addition of herbs to smelted metals; 2. ingredients which are added latter to the recipe in small quantities.

āyu,āyuṣ

vitality; life-span.

bala

physical strength; vigour; force; vitality.

bhagandara

fistula-in-ano; rectal fistula.

bhasma

calx; cinder; prepared from metals and minerals by a process of calcination, ash preparation, ex: abhraka bhasma.

bhāvana

impregnation; a powdered metal macerated with a liquid several times to transfer some traits.

bisa

Plant stalk of lotus; bisavartma porous condition of sebaceous gland; xanthelasma; a disease of eye.

brahmacarya

chaste life; celibacy before marriage; sexual restrain to promote physical, mental and spiritual health.

brahmakāya

divine body; a person with godly traits like adhering to cleanliness and good conduct, belief in existence of god, reverence of elders and preceptors, hospitality and celebration of religious sacrifices and reader of vedas.

candana

Plant sandalwood, Santalum album, S. verum.

candanāditaila

medicated oil made from sandalwood and other herbs as coolant and to restore vitality to skin.

candradala

a metal treated with mercury or other metals attains whitenss or yellowness.

carmasāhva

Go to saptalā

cullikā

the disappearance of golden colour of metal after few days; see patangi.

ḍālana

pouring of smelted metal into liquids, a process in medicinal alchemy.

danta

teeth, dantabhanjana loss of teeth, dantacala loose tooth, danta grāhi chilling of teeth due to cold beverages; dantakapālika tartar forming flakes; krimidanta dental caries, dantaharṣa morbid sensitiveness of teeth, intolerance to cold; dantamāmsas gums; dantanāḍi dental sinus; dantapuppuṭa gum boil, gingivitis; dantaśalāka toothpick, dantaśarkara tartar, dantaśaṭha bad for teeth ex: citrus; dantaśūla toothache, dantavaidarbha loose teeth due to injury; dantavardhana extra tooth; dantaveṣṭa pyorrhoea alveolaris, formation of pus in teeth.

dehavedha

breaking through the human body; transformation of human body into immortal one.

dhātu

1. metal; 2. root words (linguistic elements) of Sanskrit language. 3. tissues – rasa (chyle, lymph, etc), rakta (blood), mamsa (muscle), medas (adipose tissue), asthi (cartilage and bone), majja (bone marrow), and śukra (reproductive elements).

druti

metals in liquid form.

dugdha

milk, dugdhapāṣāṇa talk of stone; calcareous spar (a mineral).

eṣaṇi

metallic probe.

garbha

uterine cavity; pregnancy; garbhadoṣa foetal anomaly; garbhakośa uterine cavity; garbhapancaka limbs and head of the fetus; garbhapāta abortion; garbha sanga retentiion of foetus; garbhaśayya fundus of uterus; garbhasrāva threatened abortion; miscarriage, garbhasthāpana conception; impregnation.

ghoṣa

Plant dill plant; singing in the ear; noise; bell-metal.

grāsa

swallowing; lower metals swallowed by mercury.

guda

anus; rectum; gudabhramśa anal prolapse; prolapse of rectum; gudavasti rectal enema.

janmabalapravṛttavyādhi

(janma.bala.pravṛttha.vyādh) diseases arising from congenetal defects; problems arising during pregnancy.

jāraṇa

roasting; oxidizing metals; amalgamation of mercury; assimilation; digestion of metals by mercury.

jīvātma

individual soul; vital principle.

kalamba

Plant the stalk of pot herb or leafy vegetable; Convolvulus repens; Nuclcea cadamba.

kālāntaraprāṇahara

a group of vital points that kill later.

kāma

pleasure, sensual and mental enjoyment, love, lust.

kangu

Plant foxtail millet, Setaria italica.

karṇa

ear, karṇanāda tinnitus, karṇapāka otitis externa diffusa, karṇapippali cysts, polyps in the ear; karṇapūrana fill medicated oil in the ear, karṇarog ear disease, karṇaśodha edema; sūla earache, otalgia, karṇavedhi, karṇavyadha ear-boring.

karpūrāśma

crystal.

kasamarda

Plant Cassia occidentalis; negro coffee, stinking weed.

kitta

waste, excretal substance, debris.

klama

languor, mental fatigue.

kośa

sheaths inside the body, namely the sheath of knowledge (jnānamaya), the sheath of bliss (ānadamaya), the sheath of vitality (prāṇamaya), the sheath of mind (manomaya) and the sheath of food (annamaya) explained in the Taittareya upaniṣad.

krimi

worm, helminthiasis, krimidanta dental caries.

kṛkara

1. kind of partridge bird, 2. one of five vital breaths; 3. kind of pepper; 3. fragrant oleander tree.

kṣārasūtra

alkali thread; treatment procedures for anorectal disorders.

kucandana

Plant 1. sappanwood, Caesalpinia sappan; 2 coralwood tree, Adenathera pavonia. 3. redsander tree, Pterocarpus santalinus.

kucikarṇaka

congenital deformity of the lobule of pinna.

kuntali

Go to parpoṭi

kūpipakvarasāyana

pharmaceutical preparation made from substances of mineral and metallic origin using a glass flask (kāckūpi), ex: makaradhvaja.

lalāṭa

forehead, frontal.

laulya

mental perversion.

liṅganāśa

total cataract; loss of visual perception.

loha

metal, lohabhasma ash prepared from iron.

lohavedha

transmutation of base metals into gold.

lohitīkaraṇa

turning into metal.

mahārasa

primary alchemical substances, mercury (pādarasa), vermillion (hingulīka), mica (abhraka), loadstone (kāntaloha), iron pyrites (vimala), pyrites (mākṣika), tourmaline (vaikrānta), conch (śankha).

māraṇa

incineration of a metallic or mineral product, heating at high temperature.

mardana

1. rubbing, massaging, 2. grinding, rubbing, washing ores and metallic substances with extracts of plants.

marma

lethal point, sensitive points on different parts of the body showing irregular pulsation and pain persists on pressure. Conglomerations of muscle, blood vessels, ligaments, nerves, bone and joints; marmavikāra disorders of vital points.

mayūrāsana

peacock pose; a yogic posture raising the body like a horizontal stick on the support of forearm on the ground.

mūṣa

crucible, an utensil that can withstand high temparatures, used to remove morbid elements (doṣa) from various metals and minerals, especially to prepare ashes (bhasma).

nāga

1. lead, plumbum; metallic substance used in rasaśāstra; 2. snake.

naimittika

casual, accidental.

nirvāpana

immersion of heated metals into some liquid.

niścandratva

absence of brightness; test for improperly processed metal. In this test, the bhasma is observed under bright sunlight to see whether the lustrous particles are present. Presence of lustrous particles indicates the need for further incineration.

pāda

foot, motor organ that helps in locomotion; pādabhramśa foot drop; pādadāha burning sole; feet; pādaśūla pain in the foot; pādasuptata numbness of feet; pādatala sole.

padmacāriṇi

Plant 1. confederate rose or cotton rosemallow, Hibiscus mutabilis; 2. tall shield orchid, Nervilia aragoana.

palāla

Plant stalk of sorghum, millet.

pariśṛta

chronic infection of genital organs leading to infertility.

pārśvaśūla

pain-thorax, intercostal neuralgia.

patala

Plant fragrant padri tree, Stereospermum chelonoides.

patangi

induction of golden colour to silver or any other metal by applying paste of herbs.

pinjāri

1. reddish yellow; 2. a metal thrown in another metal, 3. heated and cooled in a liquid with change of colour.

pittala

brass, bell metal.

pravāhini

one of the three rectal folds that allow defecation /furthering.

pulāka

Plant rock-crystal; a species of edible plant.

pumsavana

one of the sixteen rites conducted in the prenatal life to help mother conceive male baby.

puṣyānugacūrṇa

a polyherbal medicine used in leucorrhoea and other female genital diseases.

raktacandana

Plant redsanders; heartwood of Pterocarpus santalinus.

rāmaśītalika

Plant Amaranthus tricolor, A. gangeticus. amaranth or elephant head amaranth.

raupyam

silver metal.

rekhapurṇatva

filling lines and wrinkles on palm; a test for improperly processed metal. This test is performed to test the microfineness of bhasma/cinder.

rīti,rītika

Go to pittala.

rujākamarma

painful vital points

sadyahprāṇahara

quickly destroying, killing instantaneously; a group of vital points on the body.

sahasrāra

thousand petaled, one of the ṣaṭcakras.

śālākya

diseases of head (ear, nose, throat, dental and head), supraclavicular therapy.

samskāra

rites with scientific significance on reaching developmental milestones; refining; forming well, alchemical operations.

samvaraṇi

one of the three rectal folds that helps holding back feces.

sanghātabalapravṛttivyādhi

(sanghāta.bala.pravṛthi.vyādhi) diseases caused by external or environmental factors.

sannirudhaguda

rectal stricture and difficulty in defecation.

saptala

Plant 1. green spurge, Euphorbea dracanuloides; 2. soap nut, shikakai, Acacia sinuata, A. concinna.

saptāmṛtaloha

herbo-mineral preparation used in eye ailments.

sārika

a talking bird; myna.

satva

1. purity or pure state of mind; mental strength, one of the psychic humors; 2. extract prepared from a mineral substance. 3. sun-dried paste prepared from a cold infusion which is set in the sun until all the moisture evaporates and the concentrate becomes solid.

śayana

scholar of Hampi, the capital of Viajayanagara empire (14th – 15th Century ), author of Ayurveda sudhanidhi, the manuscript is not available.

śikhariṇi

curds, fruits, cinnamon tvak, cardamom ela, honey madhu, ghee ājyam, pepper marīcam and crystal sugar śarkara are well mixed, churned and strained through a white cloth and kept in a vessel scented with camphor is known as śikhariṇi; eminent or excellent woman.

śīrnavrinta

1. slender-stalked, 2. water-melon.

śiśira

1. cool or dewy season, two-month period after monsoon; 2. Plant candana or Santalum album.

sita

1. crystalline sugar, 2. bamboo juice.

śītāda

scorbutic gingivitis; spongy gums; scurvy; an early stage of periodontal disease.

śītala

goddess of small pox.

sodhana

1. purification, removal of harmful metabolic substances from the body; cleansing measures; 2. purification of metalic substances, ores by boiling, triturating in various herbal juices, and grinding.

śriṇgāṭaka

1. Plant water chestnut, seeds of Trapa natans, T. brispinosa, T. quadrispinosa; 2. lethal point (marma) in occipital region of skull; 3. particular configuration of the planets; 4. minced meat.

śrungāṭaka

a lethal point at the occipital region on the head.

sūcīmukhi

needle-like or narrow opening of genital tract in women.

sūryāvarta

headache that increases and decreases according to the course of sun; frontal sinusitis.

svarṇamākṣika

copper pyrites or chalcopyrites; copper iron sulfide, occuring as brass-yellow crystals or masses.

śvetacandana

Plant sandal wood, Santalum album.

tagara

Plant Indian valerian, rhizome, stolon (horizontal conncections) and roots of Valeriana wallichii.

tala

a flat surface; the palm or sole.

talahṛdaya

lethal points in the centre of palms and soles, whose damage can cause pain and eventual death.

talayantra

spoonshaped surgical instrument; picklock-like instrument.

turuṣka

1. Turkish or belonging to Turkey; 2. Plant oriental sweet gum, Liquidambar orientalis.

udāvarta

upward movement of gases, mis-peristalsis.

uparatna

kāca (glass), karpūrāśma (crystal), muktāśukti (pearl-oyster), śankha (conch) et Century

vācāla

talkative; loquacious.

vaṅga

tin, vaṅgabhasma ash preparation from tin metal.

vardhanaka

an ornament made of wood or metal used after piercing the ears to maintain the hole.

vāritara,vāritaratva

float on water; a test for improperly processed metal. This is one of the physical analytical parameters for bhasma, and is applied to study the lightness and fineness of prepared bhasma.

vartaloha

bell metal, sort of brass or steel.

tala

windy, stormy, flatulent.

venāmra

Plant cashewnut tree, Anacardium occidentale.

viparītalajjālu

Plant better stud, Biophytum sensitivum.

vīrya

1. semen; 2. temperamental potency; 3. potency of a drug

viṣagarbhataila

medicated oil with sesame base to help in muscuto-skeletal diseases.

visarjini

one of the three rectal folds that helps excrete feces.

vyavasāya

certainity, resolution, mental effort.

yoṣāpasmāra

(yoṣa.apasmāra) hysteria; A mental disorder characterized by emotional excitability and sometimes by amnesia or a physical deficit, such as paralysis, or a sensory deficit, without an organic cause.

Wordnet Search
"tal" has 135 results.

tal

kāntalohaḥ   

uttamalohasya prakāraḥ।

kāntalohena śastrāṇi nirmīyante।

tal

asamatala, asama   

yad samatalaṃ nāsti।

saḥ asamatalāṃ bhūmiṃ kṛṣyarthe samatalāṃ karoti।

tal

bhūmiḥ, bhūtalam, pṛthivītalam, kṣititalam, mahātalam, kṣmātalam   

sā dharā yā jalarahitā asti।

pṛthivyāḥ ekatṛtīyāṃśaḥ bhāgaḥ bhūmyā vyāptaḥ asti।

tal

mūrtiḥ, pratimā, puttalī, puttalikā   

mṛcchilādinirmitaṃ pratirūpakam।

saḥ yāṃ kāmapi mūrtiṃ nirmāti।

tal

karatālam, hastatālam, karataladhvaniḥ   

karatalau āhatya kṛtaḥ dhvaniḥ।

bālakaḥ karatālaṃ karoti।

tal

puttalī, dāruputrikā, pāñcālikā, pāñcalikā, pāñcālī, puttalikā, śālāṅkī, śālabhañjī, śālabhañjikā, dārustrī, dārugarbhā, kuruṇṭī, añjalikārikā, yāṣā   

kāṣṭhasya putrikā।

saḥ puttalīṃ nartayati।

tal

paryyaṅkaḥ, palyaṅkaḥ, śayyā, śayanam, talpaḥ, khaṭvā, saṃstaraḥ, starimā, śayanīyam, mañcaḥ, mañcakaḥ, prastaraḥ, āstaraṇam   

kāṣṭhādiracitaśayyādhāraḥ।

mātā bālakaṃ paryaṅke śāyayati।

tal

pātālam, adhobhuvanam, nāgalokaḥ, balisadma, rasātalam, ardhaḥ, uragasthānam   

purāṇānusāreṇa pṛthvyāḥ adhastāt vartamāneṣu saptalokeṣu saptamaḥ lokaḥ।

nāgānāṃ nivāsaḥ pātāle asti iti manyate।

tal

talam, adhobhāgaḥ   

kasyapi vastunaḥ adhaḥ bhāgaḥ।

asya pātrasya tale chidram asti।

tal

buddhakālīnaḥ hastalekhaḥ, buddhakālīnaḥ hastalikhitaḥ   

buddhakāle likhitāni bastalikhitāni।

sāranāthanagaryāṃ buddhakālīnāni hastalekhāni upalabdhāni।

tal

śītalādevī   

masūrikāvyādheḥ adhiṣṭhātrī devī।

saḥ śītalādevyāḥ pūjane līnaḥ asti।

tal

alindaḥ, praghāṇaḥ, praghaṇaḥ, ālindaḥ, saudhatalam, valabhī   

bahirdvārasaṃlagnacaturasrapaṭalaḥ।

śukāṅganīlopalanirmitānāṃ lipteṣu bhāsā gṛhadehalīnām। yasyām alindeṣu na cakrureva mugdhāṅganā gomayagomukhāni।

tal

dvyaṭṭakam, dvitalam   

tat bhavanam yasmin dve tale staḥ।

sā praśaste dvitale bhavane nivasati।

tal

talam, adhobhāgaḥ, adhasthānam, adhovaśaḥ   

vastunaḥ nimnaḥ antaḥ bhāgaḥ।

pātrasya tale rakṣā sañcitā।

tal

vikīrṇacetas, dhyānahīna, atallīna   

yasmin dhyānasya abhāvaḥ asti।

vikīrṇacetāḥ bālakāḥ paṭhane durbalāḥ santi।

tal

likhitacihnam, likhitalakṣaṇam, likhitasaṃketaḥ, likhitapratīkam, likhitam cihnam, likhitam lakṣaṇam, likhitaḥ saṃketaḥ, likhitam pratīkam   

tat cihnaṃ yad likhitasvarūpeṇa upalabhyate;

saṃjñāphalake likhitacihnāni santi

tal

dharātalaḥ, bhūmiḥ, pṛthivītalam, bhū   

dharāyāḥ pṛṣṭhabhāgaḥ।

dharātalaḥ jalasthalayoḥ vibhaktaḥ।

tal

candraḥ, kalānāthaḥ, kalādharaḥ, himāṃśuḥ, candramāḥ, kumudabāndhavaḥ, vidhuḥ, sudhāṃśuḥ, śubhrāṃśuḥ, oṣadhīśaḥ, niśāpatiḥ, abjaḥ, jaivātṛkaḥ, glauḥ, mṛgāṅkaḥ, dvijarājaḥ, śaśadharaḥ, nakṣatreśaḥ, kṣapākaraḥ, doṣākaraḥ, niśīthinīnāthaḥ, śarvarīśaḥ, eṇāṅkaḥ, śītaraśmiḥ, samudranavanītaḥ, sārasaḥ, śvetavāhanaḥ, nakṣatranāmiḥ, uḍupaḥ, sudhāsūtiḥ, tithipraṇīḥ, amatiḥ, candiraḥ, citrāṭīraḥ, pakṣadharaḥ, rohiṇīśaḥ, atrinetrajaḥ, pakṣajaḥ, sindhujanmā, daśāśvaḥ, māḥ, tārāpīḍaḥ, niśāmaṇiḥ, mṛgalāñchanaḥ, darśavipat, chāyāmṛgadharaḥ, grahanemiḥ, dākṣāyaṇīpati, lakṣmīsahajaḥ, sudhākaraḥ, sudhādhāraḥ, śītabhānuḥ, tamoharaḥ, tuśārakiraṇaḥ, pariḥ, himadyutiḥ, dvijapatiḥ, viśvapsā, amṛtadīdhitiḥ, hariṇāṅkaḥ, rohiṇīpatiḥ, sindhunandanaḥ, tamonut, eṇatilakaḥ, kumudeśaḥ, kṣīrodanandanaḥ, kāntaḥ, kalāvān, yāminījatiḥ, sijraḥ, mṛgapipluḥ, sudhānidhiḥ, tuṅgī, pakṣajanmā, abdhīnavanītakaḥ, pīyūṣamahāḥ, śītamarīciḥ, śītalaḥ, trinetracūḍāmaṇiḥ, atrinetrabhūḥ, sudhāṅgaḥ, parijñāḥ, sudhāṅgaḥ, valakṣaguḥ, tuṅgīpatiḥ, yajvanāmpatiḥ, parvvadhiḥ, kleduḥ, jayantaḥ, tapasaḥ, khacamasaḥ, vikasaḥ, daśavājī, śvetavājī, amṛtasūḥ, kaumudīpatiḥ, kumudinīpatiḥ, bhūpatiḥ, dakṣajāpatiḥ, oṣadhīpatiḥ, kalābhṛt, śaśabhṛt, eṇabhṛt, chāyābhṛt, atridṛgjaḥ, niśāratnam, niśākaraḥ, amṛtaḥ, śvetadyutiḥ, hariḥ   

khagolīyapiṇḍaḥ yaḥ pṛthvīṃ paribhramati।

adhunā mānavaḥ candrasya pṛṣṭhabhāgaṃ gatvā saṃśodhanaṃ karoti।

tal

mandaḥ, tundaparimṛjaḥ, ālasyaḥ, śītakaḥ, anuṣṇaḥ, śītalaḥ, kuṇṭhaḥ, mukhanirīkṣakaḥ, anāśuḥ   

avaśyakartavyeṣu apravṛttiśīlaḥ।

mandaḥ kimapi na prāpnoti।

tal

hastalikhitam   

hastena likhitam।

bhāratadeśe naikeṣu sthāneṣu buddhakālīnāni hastalikhitāni dṛśyante।

tal

araṇyam, araṇyī, araṇyānī, vanam, vanī, aṭaviḥ, aṭavī, gahanam, gahaḥ, kānanam, vipinam, jaṅgalam, jaṅgalaḥ, dāvaḥ, kāntāraḥ, kāntāram, kutram, riktam, talkam   

bahu-vṛkṣa-yuktaṃ sthānaṃ yad mṛgaiḥ aryate।

asmin araṇye ahi-varāha-ibhānāṃ yūthāḥ tathā ca bhilla-bhalla-davā-ādayaḥ janāḥ dṛśyante।

tal

śītala, anuṣṇa, anuṣṇaka, śīkara, śiśira, suṣika, sebhya, sphīta   

yad uṣṇaṃ nāsti।

pathikaḥ nadyāḥ śītalaṃ jalaṃ pibati।

tal

śītalapeyam   

tat peyaṃ yad śītalam asti athavā himādibhiḥ saṃmiśrya śītībhavati।

saḥ cāyasya sthāne śītalapeyaṃ pibati।

tal

brāhmāṇḍa, anantalokīka   

brahmāṇḍasambandhī।

kānicana brahmāṇḍāni vastūni adhunāpi rahasyamayāni eva।

tal

kāṃsyam, ghaṇṭāśabdaḥ, ghoṣaḥ, ghorapuṣpam, tāmrārdham, pītaloham   

rāsāyanikadhātuviśeṣaḥ tāmraraṅgamiśritadhātuḥ, tasya guṇāḥ cakṣurhitakāritvam, vātakaphavikāranāśitvam।

kāṃsyakāraḥ kāṃsasya pātraṃ karoti।

tal

śaityam, śītatā, śītam, śītalatā, haimam   

śarīrasya sā anubhūtiḥ yā tāpamānahrāsāt prādurbhavati tathā ca yasyām aurṇa-vastra-paridhānasya।

prātaḥkālāt ārabhya ahaṃ śaityam anubhavāmi।

tal

talam, gṛhatalam, harmyatalam, gṛhabhūmi, gṛhabhūḥ, veśmabhūḥ, kuṭṭimam, talimam, sutalaḥ, gṛhapoṭaḥ, gṛhapotakaḥ, potaḥ   

upaveśanārthe samīkṛtā bhūmiḥ।

adhunā talasya saundaryavardhanāya naikāni sādhanāni santi।

tal

tala   

yaḥ śarīre vāyoḥ vikāraṃ vardhayati।

caṇakaḥ tathā ca kalāyasya ardhukaṃ vātalam asti।

tal

campakaḥ, cāmpeyaḥ, hemapuṣpakaḥ, svarṇapuṣpaḥ, śītalachadaḥ, subhagaḥ, bhṛṅgamohī, śītalaḥ, bhramarātithiḥ, surabhiḥ, dīpapuṣpaḥ, sthiragandhaḥ, atigandhakaḥ, sthirapuṣpaḥ, hemapuṣpaḥ, pītapuṣpaḥ, hemāhvaḥ, sukumāraḥ, vanadīpaḥ, kaṣāyaḥ   

vṛkṣaviśeṣaḥ saḥ vṛkṣaḥ yasya puṣpāṇi pītavarṇīyāni sugandhitāni ca santi।

tasya prāṅgaṇe campakaḥ kundam ityādīni santi।

tal

hastatalaḥ, karatalam, hastatalam, talam, talaḥ   

avayavaviśeṣaḥ, hastasya talaḥ।

karatalena mṛduṅagādayaḥ vādyante।

tal

pīttalaghaṭaḥ   

pīttalasya ghaṭaḥ।

dīpā navarātreḥ prathamadine pīttalaghaṭasya sthāpanāṃ karoti।

tal

kātaraḥ, kātalaḥ   

matsyaprakāraḥ yaḥ ākāreṇa bṛhat vartate।

tena haṭāt ekakiloparimāṇaṃ yāvat kātaraḥ tathā ca anye matsyāḥ krītāḥ।

tal

keśaḥ, kacaḥ, kuntalaḥ, cikuraḥ, vṛjanaḥ, bālaḥ, śiroruhaḥ, śirasijaḥ, śiroruḍhaḥ, mūrdhdajaḥ, kṛśalā   

śirasthāni lomāni।

dīrghāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇīyāḥ keśāḥ śobhanāḥ।

tal

putrikā, puttalī   

vastrādibhiḥ vinirmitā mūrtiḥ yayā bālakāḥ krīḍanti।

bālakāḥ putrikayā saha krīḍanti।

tal

vidvattallajaḥ, paṇḍitaprakāṇḍaḥ   

yaḥ atīva vidvān asti।

kālidāsaḥ saṃskṛtasya vidvattallajaḥ āsīt।

tal

caṣakaḥ, śarāvaḥ, kuntalaḥ, kuśayaḥ, śālājiraḥ   

kaṣāyādipānārtham upayuktaṃ mṛddhātvādibhiḥ vinirmitaṃ pātram।

hastāt patitvā caṣakaḥ chinnaḥ।

tal

capeṭikā, talāghātaḥ   

sampūrṇahastena kṛtaḥ āghātaḥ।

tena mahyaṃ capeṭikā dattā।

tal

kuñcikā, kūrccikā, tālī, tallikā, aṅkuṭaḥ   

tālasya pidhānārthe tathā ca udghāṭanārthe upayuktaṃ upakaraṇam।

mama tālasya kuñcikā viluptā।

tal

masūrikā, śītalā, raktavaṭī, vasantaḥ, masūrī, gulī, visphoṭaḥ, pāparogaḥ   

rogaviśeṣaḥ,yasmin duṣṭaraktena gostanaja-naragātrajeṣu masūri-sadṛśa-pūyāḥ dṛśyante।

grīṣme masūrikāyāḥ prakarṣeṇa prādurbhāvaḥ bhavati।

tal

karatalā, chūrī, kṣurī   

bṛhatī chūrikā।

tena karatalayā kukkuṭaḥ ghātitaḥ।

tal

yuvā, taruṇaḥ, yuvakaḥ, kumāraḥ, kumārakaḥ, māṇavaḥ, yuvaśaḥ, nabhasvān, vayasthaḥ, vayaḥsthaḥ, talunaḥ, veṭakaḥ, vayodhaḥ, vayobāla, garbharūpaḥ   

ṣoḍaṣavarṣāt triṃśad-varṣa-paryanta-vayaskaḥ।

bhāratīyāḥ yuvānaḥ pāścātyasaṃskṛteḥ adhīnāḥ jātāḥ। /āṣoḍaṣād bhaved bālaḥ taruṇaḥ tataḥ ucyate। vṛddhaḥ syāt saptaterrūrdhvaṃ varṣīyān navateḥ param।

tal

pādatalam, talam   

avayavaviśeṣaḥ, pādasya talam।

kṛṣṇasya pādatalam atīva sukumāram āsīt।

tal

talaḥ, talam   

kasyāpi vastunaḥ adho vartamānaḥ ādhārarūpaḥ bhāgaḥ।

asya pātrasya talaḥ bṛhad vartate।

tal

hastalikhitam   

lekhapustakādīnāṃ hastena likhitā pratiḥ।

mama hastalikhitaṃ mudraṇārthe mudraṇālaye gatam।

tal

śītalatā, śītatā, śaityam   

śītasya bhāvaḥ।

himasya śītalatayā tvak bādhate।

tal

asamatala bhūḥ   

sā bhūmiḥ yā na samānā।

asamānāyāṃ bhūmau kṛṣikāryaṃ kaṭhinam।

tal

yuvatī, yuvatiḥ, taruṇī, yūnī, talunī, dikkarī, dhanikā, dhanīkā, madhyamā, dṛṣṭarajāḥ, madhyamikā, īśvarī, varyā   

prāptayauvanā strī। (prāg yauvanā yuvatiḥ iti vātsyāyanaḥ।);

yo yaṃ vicintayati yāni sa tanmayatvam। yassmād ataḥ subhagayā iva gatā yuvatyaḥ॥

tal

bharataḥ, sarvadamanaḥ, śākuntaleyaḥ   

śakuntalāyāḥ garbhāt jātaḥ rājñaḥ duṣyantasya putraḥ।

bharataḥ bālyāvasthāyāṃ siṃhaśiśunā saha akhelat।

tal

pāñcālakaḥ, putrakaḥ, kṛtrimaputrakaḥ, cañcāpuruṣaḥ, puttalaḥ, pāñcālikā, putrikā, vastraputrikā, puttikā, śālāṅkī, kuruṇṭī, pāñcālī, pañcālī, lepyamayī, pañcālikā, śālabhañjī, śālabhañjīkā   

vastrakargajādīkṛtaputtalikā।

pitā pavanasya kṛte ekaṃ pāñcālakam akrīṇāt।

tal

pādukātalam   

pādatrāṇasya adhastanīyaṃ carmādi।

asyāḥ pādukāyāḥ pādukātalam apaṭayat।

tal

tāmram, tāmrakam, śulvam, mlecchamukham, dvyaṣṭam, variṣṭham, uḍumbaram, audumbaram, auḍumbaram, udumbaram, udambaram, dviṣṭham, tapaneṣṭam, ambakam, aravindam, raviloham, ravipriyam, raktam, naipālikam, raktadhātuḥ, munipittalam, arkam, sūryāṅgam, lohitāyasam   

dhātuviśeṣaḥ, vidyutavahanakṣamaḥ raktavarṇīyaḥ dhātuḥ yaḥ bhāṇḍādinirmāṇe upayujyate। (āyurvede asya śītalatva-kaphapittavibandhaśūlapāṇḍūdaragulmanāśitvādayaḥ guṇāḥ proktāḥ।);

japākusumasaṅkāśaṃ snigdhaṃ mṛduṃ ghanaṃ kṣamaṃ।lohanāgojjhitaṃ tāmraṃ māraṇāya praśasyate॥

tal

pittalam, ārakūṭaḥ, rītiḥ, patikāveram, dravyadāru, rītī, miśram, āraḥ, rājarītiḥ, brahmarītiḥ, kapilā, piṅgalā, kṣidrasuvarṇaḥ, siṃhalam, piṅgalakam, pītalakam, lohitakam, piṅgalaloham, pītakam   

dhātuviśeṣaḥ, pītavarṇīyaḥ rītikāyugulaguṇayuktadhātuḥ।

pāṇḍurogī tu yotyarthaṃ pittalāni niṣevate tasya pittamasṛṅmāṃsaṃ dagdhvā rogāya kalpate।

tal

rasātalam, pātālam   

lokaviśeṣaḥ, rasāyāḥ nimnabhāgasthasaptalokeṣu saptamaṃ talam।

rasātale daiteyāḥ dānavāśca nivasanti।

tal

śrutalekhaḥ   

śrutvā likhitaḥ lekhaḥ।

adhyāpakaḥ chātraiḥ śrutalekhaṃ lekhayati।

tal

hastalikhita   

hastena likhitam।

saṅgrahālaye naikānāṃ janānāṃ hastalikhitāni patrāṇi santi।

tal

alakaḥ, alakam, āvartaḥ, kamujā, kuntalaḥ, kurulaḥ, keśī, keśamaṇḍalam, keśastukaḥ, keśāntaḥ, khaṅkaraḥ, guḍālakaḥ, guḍālakam, cūḍā, cūrṇakuntalaḥ, śikhaṇḍakaḥ, śikhā, śikhāsūtram   

pṛṣṭhabhāge vāmabhāge dakṣiṇabhāge ca itastataḥ avakīrṇāḥ keśāḥ।

tasyāḥ alakena yuktaṃ mukhaṃ aparicitaḥ iva abhāsata।

tal

kuntalaḥ   

dākṣiṇātyajanapadaviśeṣaḥ।

kuntī kuntalasya rājñaḥ putrī āsīt।

tal

kuntalaḥ   

sampūrṇajātīyaḥ rāgaḥ yaḥ dīpakarāgasya caturthaḥ putraḥ asti iti manyate।

kuntalaḥ grīṣmaṛtau madhyāhne gīyate।

tal

svīkārapatram, mṛtalekhaḥ, mṛtapatram   

sā vyavasthā yayā dāyavibhāgaḥ niścīyate।

mayā ātmanaḥ svīkārapatre tubhyaṃ kimapi na pradattam।

tal

mṛtapatram, icchāpatram, mṛtyupatram, mṛtalekhaḥ, mṛtyulekhaḥ   

vaidhapatraviśeṣaḥ, yasmin patre mṛtyoḥ uparāntā svasya saṃpatteḥ viniyogavyavasthā likhyate।

sarvaiḥ mṛtyupatraṃ prāgeva avaśyaṃ lekhanīyam।

tal

karataladhvaniḥ   

hastayoḥ āghātena utpannaḥ śabdaḥ।

karataladhvaninā kakṣaḥ guñjitaḥ।

tal

talam   

jalāśayasya adhobhūmiḥ।

asyāḥ nadyāḥ talaṃ svacchaṃ dṛśyate।

tal

adhobhāgaḥ, mūlam, talam, upaṣṭambhaḥ, upāntaḥ   

kasyacit vastunaḥ kāryasya vā ārambhikaḥ bhāgaḥ।

asya mūle kim asti ityasya pariśodhanaṃ kartavyam।

tal

vṛttāntalekhakaḥ   

saḥ yaḥ viśiṣṭasthānasya vṛttaṃ likhitvā vṛttapatre patrikāyāṃ vā prakāśayituṃ preṣayati athavā dūradarśane taṃ vṛttaṃ paṭhati athavā preṣayati।

asmadīyaḥ vṛttāntalekhakaḥ sūcayati yad kukhyātaḥ taskaraḥ vīrappanaḥ ghātitaḥ।

tal

śutudrī, śitadruḥ, satalajanadī   

pañjābaprānte vartamānā ekā nadī।

pañjābaprānte vartamāneṣu pañcasu nadīṣu ekā śutudrī asti।

tal

sunayana, cārulocana, lalitalocana, sunetra   

yasya netrau śobhanīyau staḥ।

gītāyāḥ putraḥ sunayanaḥ asti।

tal

atalam   

saptapātāleṣu prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ।

atalasya ullekhaḥ vartate padmapurāṇe।

tal

vitalam   

saptapātāleṣu dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ।

vitalaṃ hastakeśvarabhagavān śāsti iti ullekhaḥ purāṇeṣu।

tal

sutalam   

saptapātāleṣu ekaḥ।

purāṇānusāreṇa sutalasya śāsakaḥ bhavati baliḥ।

tal

talātalam   

saptapātāleṣu ekaḥ।

talātalasya śāsakaḥ mayaḥ bhavati purāṇānusāreṇa।

tal

mahātalam   

saptapālāleṣu ekaḥ।

purāṇānusāreṇa mahātalaṃ bhavati mahāsarpasya vāsasthānam।

tal

agaratalā   

tripurārājyasya rājadhānī।

agaratalāpradeśe paribhramaṇāya akṭūbaramāsam ārabhya mārcamāsaparyantaṃ vartamānaḥ samayaḥ uttamaḥ bhavati।

tal

jihvātalam   

jihvāyāḥ talam।

rāmasya jihvātale sphoṭakāḥ utpannāḥ।

tal

śītalanāthaḥ   

jainadharmiyāṇāṃ caturviṃśatau tīrthaṅkareṣu ekaḥ।

śītalanāthaḥ jainadharmiyāṇāṃ daśamaḥ tīrthaṅkaraḥ āsīt।

tal

śakuntalā   

menakānāmnyaḥ apsarasaḥ kanyā।

śakuntalā rājñaḥ duṣyantasya patnī tathā ca bharatasya mātā āsīt।

tal

sukuntalaḥ   

dhṛtarāṣṭrasya ekaḥ putraḥ।

sukuntalasya varṇanaṃ bhāgavate vartate।

tal

hastalikhitatajjñaḥ, hastalikhitanipuṇaḥ   

yaḥ kasyāpi hastalekhanaṃ dṛṣṭvā tasya svabhāvam abhijānāti।

hastalikhitatajjñasya anusāraṃ śyāmaḥ atīva bhāvapūrṇaḥ asti।

tal

hastalikhitatajjñaḥ, hastalikhitanipuṇaḥ   

yaḥ hastalekhanaṃ dṛṣṭvā lekhakaḥ kaḥ asya viṣaye vetti।

hastalikhitatajjñena patreṣu hastākṣarasya parīkṣaṇaṃ kṛtam।

tal

nīlakuntalā   

pārvatyāḥ ekā sakhī।

nīlakuntalāyāḥ varṇanaṃ purāṇeṣu vartate।

tal

ratalāmanagaram   

madhyapradeśarājye vartamānam ekaṃ nagaram।

ratalāmamaṇḍalasya mukhyālayaḥ ratalāmanagare asti।

tal

ratalāmamaṇḍalam   

madhyapradeśarājye vartamānam ekaṃ maṇḍalam।

ratalāmamaṇḍalasya mukhyālayaḥ ratalāmanagare asti।

tal

supeśa, tanu, kṛśa, sutanu, saru, ślakṣṇa, śīrṇa, śāta, pātraṭa, apacita, talina, aṇu, aṇutara, āma, caṭula, pratanu, pelava, paripelava   

yasya ghanatvam alpam asti।

etad aṃśukaṃ supeśam asti।

tal

sukhāsanam, srastaraḥ, srastaram, talpam   

kaśipuyuktam āsanam।

bhavān atra sukhāsanam upaviśatu।

tal

somaḥ, candraḥ, śaśāṅkaḥ, induḥ, mayaṅkaḥ, kalānidhiḥ, kalānāthaḥ, kalādharaḥ, himāṃśuḥ, candramāḥ, kumudabāndhavaḥ, vidhuḥ, sudhāṃśuḥ, śubhrāṃśuḥ, oṣadhīśaḥ, niśāpatiḥ, abjaḥ, jaivātṛkaḥ, somaḥ, glauḥ, mṛgāṅkaḥ, dvijarājaḥ, śaśadharaḥ, nakṣatreśaḥ, kṣapākaraḥ, doṣākaraḥ, niśīthinīnāthaḥ, śarvarīśaḥ, eṇāṅkaḥ, śītaraśmiḥ, samudranavanītaḥ, sārasaḥ, śvetavāhanaḥ, nakṣatranāmiḥ, uḍupaḥ, sudhāsūtiḥ, tithipraṇīḥ, amatiḥ, candiraḥ, citrāṭīraḥ, pakṣadharaḥ, rohiṇīśaḥ, atrinetrajaḥ, pakṣajaḥ, sindhujanmā, daśāśvaḥ, māḥ, tārāpīḍaḥ, niśāmaṇiḥ, mṛgalāñchanaḥ, darśavipat, chāyāmṛgadharaḥ, grahanemiḥ, dākṣāyaṇīpati, lakṣmīsahajaḥ, sudhākaraḥ, sudhādhāraḥ, śītabhānuḥ, tamoharaḥ, tuśārakiraṇaḥ, pariḥ, himadyutiḥ, dvijapatiḥ, viśvapsā, amṛtadīdhitiḥ, hariṇāṅkaḥ, rohiṇīpatiḥ, sindhunandanaḥ, tamonut, eṇatilakaḥ, kumudeśaḥ, kṣīrodanandanaḥ, kāntaḥ, kalāvān, yāminījatiḥ, sijraḥ, mṛgapipluḥ, sudhānidhiḥ, tuṅgī, pakṣajanmā, abdhīnavanītakaḥ, pīyūṣamahāḥ, śītamarīciḥ, śītalaḥ, trinetracūḍāmaṇiḥ, atrinetrabhūḥ, sudhāṅgaḥ, parijñāḥ, sudhāṅgaḥ, valakṣaguḥ, tuṅgīpatiḥ, yajvanāmpatiḥ, parvvadhiḥ, kleduḥ, jayantaḥ, tapasaḥ, khacamasaḥ, vikasaḥ, daśavājī, śvetavājī, amṛtasūḥ, kaumudīpatiḥ, kumudinīpatiḥ, bhūpatiḥ, dakṣajāpatiḥ, oṣadhīpatiḥ, kalābhṛt, śaśabhṛt, eṇabhṛt, chāyābhṛt, atridṛgjaḥ, niśāratnam, niśākaraḥ, amṛtaḥ, śvetadyutiḥ   

devatāviśeṣaḥ;

patitaṃ somamālokya brahmā lokapitāmahaḥ[śa.ka]

tal

taliḥ   

indrasārathiḥ।

rāmarāvaṇayuddhe mātaliḥ rāmasya sārathiḥ āsīt।

tal

hastalikhitam, pustakam, kācanakī, pustam, lekhaḥ   

hastena likhitaṃ patram।

saṅgrahālaye'smin bahūni prācīnāni hastalikhitāni santi।

tal

naukātalam, nautalam, naukāstaraṇam   

naukāyāṃ vartamānaḥ unnataḥ bhāgaḥ।

kecana karmakarāḥ naukātale upaviśanti।

tal

kāntaloham, cumbakaḥ, kāntapāṣāṇaḥ   

sādhanaviśeṣaḥ, viśiṣṭakāryārthe vinirmitaḥ cumbakasya guṇadharmayuktaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, yasya cumbanakṣamatā na kadāpi kṣīyate;

kāntalohaḥ loham ākarṣati

tal

gajapippalī, karipippalī, ibhakaṇā, kapivallī, kapillikā, śreyasī, vaśiraḥ, gajāhvā, kolavallī, vasiraḥ, gajoṣaṇā, cavyaphalam, cavyajā, chidravaidehī, dīrghagranthiḥ, taijasī, vartalī, sthūlavaidehī   

madhyamākārasya vṛkṣaviśeṣaḥ।

gajapippalyāḥ kaścit bhāgaḥ bheṣajarūpeṇa prayujyate।

tal

aruṇī, rohiṇī, vāyusambhavā, śītalā   

raktavarṇīyā gauḥ।

gopālakaḥ aruṇyāḥ viśeṣaṃ poṣaṇaṃ karoti।

tal

pañcāśatalakṣam   

pañcāśatalakṣayuktā saṅkhyā।

tena pañcāśatalakṣe ekasahastraṃ punaḥ yojitam।

tal

pañcāśatalakṣa   

pañcaśatāni sahastrāṇi।

mayā pañcāśatalakṣāṇi rūpyakāṇi vittakoṣe sthāpitāni।

tal

kuntalaḥ, keśāntaḥ, keśastukaḥ, khaṅkaraḥ, cūrṇakuntalaḥ, keśamaṇḍalaḥ, guḍālakaḥ   

keśānāṃ kalakaḥ।

kapolasthān kuntalān sā saṅkocati।

tal

keśarājaḥ, bhṛṅgarājaḥ, bhṛṅgaḥ, pataṅgaḥ, mārkaraḥ, mārkavaḥ, nāgamāraḥ, pavaruḥ, bhṛṅgasodaraḥ, keśarañjanaḥ, keśyaḥ, kuntalavardhanaḥ, aṅgārakaḥ ekarajaḥ, karañjakaḥ, bhṛṅgarajaḥ, bhṛṅgāraḥ, ajāgaraḥ, bhṛṅgarajāḥ, makaraḥ   

vanaspativiśeṣaḥ।

keśarājasya upayogaḥ auṣadharūpeṇa kriyate।

tal

kusumitalatāvellikā   

varṇavṛttaviśeṣaḥ।

kusumitalatāvellikāyām aṣṭādaśa varṇāḥ santi।

tal

samatalabhūmiḥ   

parvatīyapradeśāt anyaḥ bhūbhāgaḥ yaḥ prāyaḥ samatalaḥ bhavati।

parvatānāṃ madhye samatalabhūmau janāḥ vasanti।

tal

kacchaḥ, nandī, nandivṛkṣaḥ, kacchapaḥ, kuṭherakaḥ, tuṇiḥ, tunnakaḥ, samāsavān, kāntalakaḥ, kuberaḥ, kuberakaḥ, mahākacchaḥ, tunnakaḥ, kuṇiḥ   

vṛkṣaviśeṣaḥ asya guṇāḥ tiktaṃ pāke kaṭugrāhī vātalaṃ kaphapittajit ।

tatra bahavaḥ kacchāḥ santi

tal

kātaraḥ, kātalaḥ   

ekaḥ matsyaḥ ।

kātaraḥ nadyādiṣu vartate

tal

kusumitalatāvellikā   

chandoviśeṣaḥ ।

kusumitalatāvellikāyāṃ catasraḥ paṅktayaḥ santi tathā ca pratyekeṣu aṣṭādaśavarṇāḥ santi

tal

talaḥ   

ekaḥ narakaḥ ।

talasya ullekhaḥ āruṇeyaupaniṣadi vartate

tal

talaḥ   

ekaḥ ācāryaḥ ।

talaḥ śaunakādigaṇe parigaṇitaḥ

tal

talātalaḥ   

ekaḥ narakaḥ ।

talātalasya ullekhaḥ āruṇeyaupaniṣadi vartate

tal

kuntalaḥ   

ekā jātiḥ ।

kuntalaḥ viṣṇupurāṇe ullikhitaḥ

tal

kuntalasvātikarṇa:   

eko rājaputraḥ ।

viṣṇupurāṇe kuntalasvātikarṇaḥ samullikhitaḥ

tal

kusumitalatā   

ekaṃ chandaḥ, yasmin catvāri caraṇāni praticaraṇe aṣṭādaśa akṣarāṇi santi ।

kusumitalatāyāṃ chandasi api kāvyaṃ racitam asti

tal

kṛtalakṣaṇaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

kṛtalakṣaṇasya varṇanaṃ harivaṃśe prāpyate

tal

śītaladīkṣitaḥ   

ekaḥ lekhakaḥ ।

śītaladīkṣitasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

tal

śītalaprasādaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

śītalaprasādasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tal

śṛṅgārāmṛtalaharī   

ekā sāhityaśāstrīyā kṛtiḥ ।

śṛṅgārāmṛtalaharyāḥ racayitā sāmarājaḥ asti

tal

kuntalaḥ   

ekā jātiḥ ।

kuntalaḥ viṣṇupurāṇe ullikhitaḥ

tal

kuntalasvātikarṇa:   

eko rājaputraḥ ।

viṣṇupurāṇe kuntalasvātikarṇaḥ samullikhitaḥ

tal

kusumitalatā   

ekaṃ chandaḥ,yasmin catvāri caraṇāni praticaraṇe aṣṭādaśa akṣarāṇi santi ।

kusumitalatāyāṃ chandasi api kāvyaṃ racitam asti

tal

kṛtalakṣaṇaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

kṛtalakṣaṇasya varṇanaṃ harivaṃśe prāpyate

tal

rasātalaḥ   

saptanarakeṣu ekaḥ ।

rasātalasya ullekhaḥ mahābhārate vartate

tal

rasātalaḥ   

jyetiṣaśāstre vartamānaṣu gṛheṣu caturthaṃ gṛham ।

rasātalasya ullekhaḥ bṛhatsaṃhitāyāṃ vartate

tal

rasātalaḥ   

ekaḥ kaviḥ ।

rasātalasya ullekhaḥ kośe vartate

tal

kauntalaḥ, kontalaḥ   

ekaḥ janasamūhaḥ ।

kauntalasya varṇanaṃ harivaṃśe dṛśyate

tal

saṅgatalaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

saṅgatalasya ullekhaḥ bauddhasāhitye asti

tal

saptalaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

saptalasya ullekhaḥ naḍādigaṇe asti

tal

saptalakṣaṇam   

kṛtiviśeṣaḥ ।

saptalakṣaṇam iti nāmakāḥ naikāḥ kṛtayaḥ santi

tal

talaḥ   

ekaḥ kaviḥ ।

sātalasya ullekhaḥ vivaraṇapustikāyām asti

tal

siddhāntalakṣaṇam   

kṛtiviśeṣaḥ ।

siddhāntalakṣaṇam iti nāmakāḥ naikāḥ kṛtayaḥ santi

tal

kauntalaḥ , kontalaḥ   

ekaḥ janasamūhaḥ ।

kauntalasya varṇanaṃ harivaṃśe dṛśyate

tal

totalaḥ   

ekaḥ lekhakaḥ ।

totalasya ullekhaḥ toḍarānandena kṛtam

tal

totalā   

ekā devī ।

totalāyāḥ ullekhaḥ kośe vartate

tal

ārāmaśītalā   

sugandhitaiḥ puṣpaiḥ yuktaḥ ekaḥ kṣupaḥ ।

ārāmaśītalāyāḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tal

talakaḥ   

eka rājaputraḥ ।

talakasya ullekhaḥ bhāgavatapurāṇe asti

tal

talakoṭaḥ   

ekaḥ kṣupaḥ ।

talakoṭasya ullekhaḥ suśrutenaḥ kṛtaḥ

tal

talaprahāraḥ   

ekaḥ vīraḥ ।

talaprahārasya ullekhaḥ vīracarite asti

tal

talavakāraḥ   

sāmavedasya pāṭhaśālā ।

talavakārasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tal

talinaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

talinasya ullekhaḥ pravaragrantheṣu asti

tal

talukṣaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

talukṣasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

tal

totalaḥ   

ekaḥ lekhakaḥ ।

totalasya ullekhaḥ toḍarānandena kṛtam

tal

totalā   

ekā devī ।

totalāyāḥ ullekhaḥ kośe vartate

tal

talaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

kātalaḥ naḍādigaṇe parigaṇitaḥ

Parse Time: 2.048s Search Word: tal Input Encoding: IAST IAST: tal